Document:

Exhibit 10.10

 

Date 19 September 2006

 

 

AEGEAN MARINE PETROLEUM S.A.

as Borrower

 

– and –

 

THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND PLC

as Lender

 

 

AMENDMENT AGREEMENT

 

 

relating to a US$25,000,000 revolving credit and
 letter of credit issuance and
refinancing facility

 

 

WATSON, FARLEY & WILLIAMS LLP

London

 

 

INDEX

 

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Page

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  1

  	
  DEFINITIONS

  	
  1

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  2

  	
  CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

  	
  2

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  3

  	
  AMENDMENT AND RESTATEMENT OF LOAN AGREEMENT

  	
  2

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  4

  	
  EXPENSES

  	
  3

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  5

  	
  COMMUNICATIONS

  	
  3

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  6

  	
  GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

  	
  3

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  SCHEDULE 1 AMENDED AND RESTATED LOAN AGREEMENT

  	
  4

  
	
   

  	
   

  
	
  EXECUTION PAGE

  	
  52

  

 

 

THIS
AMENDMENT AGREEMENT is made on 19 Sept. 2006

 

BETWEEN

 

(1)       AEGEAN MARINE PETROLEUM S.A., a company
incorporated in Liberia and acting through its branch at 42 Hatzikyriakou Street,
185 38 Piraeus, Greece (the “Borrower”);
and

 

(2)       THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND PLC, a company
incorporated in Scotland and acting through its office at 5th Floor, 135,
Bishopsgate, London EC2M 3UR (together with its successors and assigns, the “Lender”).

 

WHEREAS

 

(A)      By
a loan agreement dated 24 September 2004 (the “Loan Agreement”) the Lender has made available to the Borrower
a revolving credit facility of up to US$25,000,000 for the purpose of
purchasing and transporting fuel cargoes and payment of other expenses
incidental to the supply of bunkers and lubricants to customers.

 

(B)      By
an Amendment Agreement dated 22 June 2005 the Lender and the Borrower agreed
that the Loan Agreement be amended to enable the Borrower to request
Utilisations consisting of L/Cs denominated in currencies other than Dollars
and to allow Receivables to be paid into the Borrower’s Current Account,
subject to certain terms and conditions and the Lender and the Borrower further
agreed that the security package in respect of the Borrower’s obligations under
the Loan Agreement be augmented to take account of those amendments.

 

(C)      The
Loan Agreement was amended and restated to reflect the amendments described in
Recital (B) above.

 

(D)      The
Lender and the Borrower have now agreed that the Loan Agreement shall be
further amended to give effect to the following:

 

(i)        the
extension of the term of the Facility to the first anniversary of the Effective
Date;

 

(ii)       the
increase of the Commitment to $50,000,000 or its equivalent in an Optional
Currency or Optional Currencies;

 

(iii)      the
issuance by the Lender of different types of instrument;

 

(iv)     changes
to the pricing charged by the Lender for providing the Facility; and

 

(v)      certain
further minor amendments to the Loan Agreement.

 

(E)       The
Lender and the Borrower have further agreed that the security package in
respect of the Borrower’s obligations under the Loan Agreement shall be
augmented to take account of the amendments described in Recital (D) above.

 

(F)       The
Lender and the Borrower have now agreed to amend the terms and conditions of
the Loan Agreement in the manner set out in Clause 3.

 

IT IS
AGREED as follows:

 

1         DEFINITIONS

 

1.1      Defined terms. In this Agreement, unless the
context otherwise requires:

 

 

“Amended
and Restated Loan Agreement” means the Loan Agreement as
amended and restated by this Agreement in the form set out in Schedule 1;

 

“Effective
Date” means the date on which the Lender notifies the
Borrower that the conditions precedent contained in Clause 2 have been satisfied;
and

 

“Loan
Agreement” means the Loan Agreement dated 24 September 2004
referred to in Recital (A) as amended and restated by the Amendment Agreement
dated 22 June 2005 referred to in Recital (B).

 

1.2      Incorporation of defined terms. Capitalised
terms used in this Agreement shall have the same meaning given to them in the
Amended and Restated Loan Agreement unless otherwise defined or unless the
context requires otherwise.

 

1.3      Application of construction and interpretation
provisions of Amended and Restated Loan Agreement. Clauses 1.2 to 1.6 of
the Amended and Restated Loan Agreement apply, with any necessary
modifications, to this Agreement.

 

2         CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

2.1      Conditions precedent. The coming into effect
of the amendments to the Loan Agreement contained in Clause 3 is subject to the
condition that the Lender shall have received:

 

(a)       the
documents specified in Clause 2.2 in all respects in form and substance
satisfactory to it and its lawyers; and

 

(b)       an
arrangement fee of $50,000.

 

2.2      Conditions precedent documents. The documents
referred to in Clause 2.1 are the following:

 

(a)       a
duly executed original of this Agreement;

 

(b)       a
duly executed Guarantee Side Letter;

 

(c)       a
duly executed Account Security Document Supplement;

 

(d)       a
duly executed Additional Account Security Document Supplement;

 

(e)       a
certified copy of a resolution of the Board of Directors of the Borrower
approving this Agreement, the Account Security Document Supplement and the
Additional Account Security Document Supplement and authorising their execution
and delivery on behalf of the Borrower; and

 

(f)        legal
opinions from lawyers appointed by the Lender on such matters concerning the
laws of Liberia and of Greece as the Lender may require.

 

3         AMENDMENT AND RESTATEMENT OF LOAN AGREEMENT

 

3.1      Amendments to Loan Agreement. With effect on
and from the Effective Date the Loan Agreement shall be, and shall be deemed by
this Agreement to be, amended and restated in the form of the Amended and
Restated Loan Agreement; and, as so amended and restated, the Loan Agreement
shall continue to be binding on each of the parties to it in accordance with
its terms as so amended and restated.

 

3.2      Security Documents to remain in full force
and effect. Each of the Security Documents to which the Borrower is
a party shall remain in full force and effect as

 

2

 

security for the
obligations of the Borrower under the Amended and Restated Loan Agreement.

 

3.3      General. With effect on and from the Effective
Date, all references in any Security Document to which the Borrower is a party
or any related document to the “Loan Agreement” shall be construed as if the
same referred to the Loan Agreement as amended and restated by this Agreement.

 

3.4      Loan Agreement to remain in full force and
effect. Except for:

 

(a)       the
modifications contained or referred to in Clauses 3.1; and

 

(b)       such
further or consequential modifications as may be necessary to give full effect
to the terms of this Agreement,

 

the Loan Agreement shall
remain in full force and effect.

 

3.5      Schedules. Schedule 1 to this Agreement sets
out the Loan Agreement (without Appendices) as modified by this Agreement.

 

4         EXPENSES

 

4.1      Expenses. The provisions of clause 18 (fees
and expenses) of the Amended and Restated Loan Agreement shall apply to this
Agreement as if they were expressly incorporated in this Agreement with any
necessary modifications.

 

5         COMMUNICATIONS

 

5.1      Communications. The provisions of clause 26
(Notices) of the Amended and Restated Loan Agreement shall apply to this
Agreement as if they were expressly incorporated in this Agreement with any
necessary modifications.

 

6         GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

 

6.1      Governing law. This Agreement shall be
governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England.

 

6.2      Jurisdiction. The provisions of clauses 28.2
to 28.6 of the Loan Agreement shall apply to this Agreement as if they were
expressly incorporated in this Agreement with any necessary modifications.

 

6.3      Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed
in any number of counterparts, and this has the same effect as if the
signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Agreement.

 

AS
WITNESS the hands of the duly authorised officers or
attorneys of the parties the day and year first above written.

 

3

 

SCHEDULE 1

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED LOAN AGREEMENT

 

4

 

AEGEAN MARINE PETROLEUM S.A.

as
Borrower

 

– and –

 

THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND PLC

as
Lender

 

 

 

LOAN AGREEMENT

originally dated 24 September 2004

as amended and restated by a

First Amendment Agreement

dated 22 June 2005 and as further

amended and restated by a Second Amendment Agreement

dated [•] 2006

 

 

relating
to

a US$50,000,000 (with Optional Currency provisions)

revolving credit and letter of credit issuance

and refinancing facility

 

 

WATSON, FARLEY & WILLIAMS LLP 

London

 

 

INDEX

 

	
  Clause

  	
   

  	
  Page

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  1

  	
  INTERPRETATION

  	
  1

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  2

  	
  FACILITY

  	
  10

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  3

  	
  UTILISATION

  	
  11

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  4

  	
  SELECTION
  OF OPTIONAL CURRENCIES FOR L/CS

  	
  14

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  5

  	
  AMOUNT
  OF OPTIONAL CURRENCIES

  	
  14

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  6

  	
  CONDITIONS
  PRECEDENT

  	
  15

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  7

  	
  INTEREST

  	
  15

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  8

  	
  INTEREST
  PERIODS

  	
  16

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  9

  	
  DEFAULT
  INTEREST

  	
  16

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  10

  	
  REDUCTION
  OF LETTERS OF CREDIT

  	
  17

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  11

  	
  SETTLEMENT
  OF LETTERS OF CREDIT

  	
  17

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  12

  	
  INDEMNITY
  OF THE BORROWER

  	
  18

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  13

  	
  REPAYMENT,
  PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

  	
  21

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  14

  	
  REPRESENTATIONS
  AND WARRANTIES

  	
  22

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  15

  	
  UNDERTAKINGS

  	
  24

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  16

  	
  PAYMENTS
  AND CALCULATIONS

  	
  26

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  17

  	
  EVENTS
  OF DEFAULT

  	
  28

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  18

  	
  FEES
  AND EXPENSES

  	
  32

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  19

  	
  INDEMNITIES

  	
  33

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  20

  	
  NO
  SET-OFF OR TAX DEDUCTION

  	
  35

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  21

  	
  ILLEGALITY,
  ETC

  	
  35

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  22

  	
  INCREASED
  COSTS

  	
  36

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  23

  	
  SET-OFF

  	
  37

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  24

  	
  TRANSFERS
  AND CHANGES IN FACILITY OFFICES

  	
  37

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  25

  	
  VARIATIONS
  AND WAIVERS

  	
  38

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  26

  	
  NOTICES

  	
  39

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  27

  	
  SUPPLEMENTAL

  	
  40

  

 

 

	
  28

  	
  LAW
  AND JURISDICTION

  	
  40

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  SCHEDULE
  1 PART A FORM OF UTILISATION NOTICE - ADVANCE

  	
  42

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  SCHEDULE
  1 PART B FORM OF UTILISATION NOTICE - LETTER OF CREDIT

  	
  44

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  SCHEDULE
  2 CONDITION PRECEDENT DOCUMENTS

  	
  46

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  SCHEDULE
  3 CALCULATION OF MANDATORY COST RATE

  	
  47

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  EXECUTION
  PAGE

  	
  48

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  APPENDIX
  A FORM OF DEED OF ASSIGNMENT

  	
  49

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  APPENDIX
  B FORM OF ACCOUNT SECURITY DOCUMENT

  	
  50

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  APPENDIX
  C FORM OF ADDITIONAL ACCOUNT SECURITY DOCUMENT

  	
  51

  
				

 

 

THIS
REVOLVING CREDIT AGREEMENT is made on 24 September 2004 as
amended and restated by a First Amendment Agreement dated 22 June 2005 and as
further amended and restated by a Second Amendment Agreement dated [•]
2006.

 

BETWEEN

 

(3)       AEGEAN MARINE PETROLEUM S.A., a corporation
incorporated in Liberia and acting through its branch at 42 Hatzikyriakou
Street, 185 38 Piraeus, Greece (the “Borrower”); and

 

(4)       THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND PLC, a company
incorporated in Scotland and acting through its office at 5th Floor, 135,
Bishopsgate, London EC2M 3UR (together with its successors and assigns, the “Lender”).

 

WHEREAS

 

(A)      By
a loan agreement dated 24 September 2004 as amended and restated by the First
Amendment Agreement (as defined in Clause 1.1) and made between (i) the
Borrower and (ii) the Lender (as so amended and restated the “Loan Agreement”) the Lender has agreed to make available to the Borrower a
revolving credit facility of up to US$25,000,000 (with Optional Currency
provisions) for the purpose of purchasing and transporting fuel cargoes and payment
of other expenses incidental to the supply of bunkers and lubricants to
customers.

 

(B)      By
the Second Amendment Agreement (as defined in Clause 1.1), the Borrower and the
Lender have agreed to make certain amendments to the Loan Agreement.

 

(C)      This
Agreement sets out the terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement as amended
and restated by the Second Amendment Agreement.

 

IT IS
AGREED as follows:

 

1         INTERPRETATION

 

1.1      Definitions. Subject to Clause 1.4, in this
Agreement:

 

“Account
Security Document” means the account security document in the
form set out in Appendix B;

 

“Account
Security Document Supplement” means a document supplemental
to the Account Security Document in a form acceptable to the Lender and entered
into by the Borrower on or about the same date as the Second Amendment
Agreement;

 

“Additional
Account Security Document” means the account security
document in the form set out in Appendix C;

 

“Additional
Account Security Document Supplement” means a document
supplemental to the Additional Account Security Document in a form acceptable
to the Lender and entered into by the Borrower on or about the same date as the
Second Amendment Agreement;

 

“Administration
Notice” means a notice appointing an administrator, a notice
of intended appointment and any other notice which is required by law
(generally or in the case concerned) to be filed with the court or given to a
person before, or in connection with, the appointment of an administrator;

 

“Advance”
means the principal amount of each borrowing by the Borrower
under this Agreement, whether by way of:

 

 

(a)       a
borrowing under Clauses 3.9 to 3.12; or

 

(b)      a
borrowing under Clause 11.2(b);

 

“Aggregate
Liabilities” means, at any time, the aggregate of the Loan
and the Outstandings;

 

“Availability
Period” means the period commencing on the date of this
Agreement and ending on:

 

(a)       the
date falling 1 month before the Termination Date (or such later date as the
Lender may agree with the Borrower); or

 

(b)      if
earlier, the date on which the Lender’s obligation to make the Facility
available is fully cancelled or terminated;

 

“Available
Commitment” means, at any time, the Commitment less the
amount of the Aggregate Liabilities at that time;

 

“Beneficiary”
means, in relation to an L/C, the person in whose favour the
L/C has been issued under this Agreement;

 

“Business
Day” means a day on which banks are open in London and Greece
and, in respect of a day on which payment is required to be made or other
dealing is due to take place under this Agreement:

 

(a)       in
Dollars, a day on which banks are open in New York City;

 

(b)      in
an Optional Currency (other than Euros), a day on which banks are open in New
York City and the principal financial centre of the country of that Optional
Currency; and

 

(c)       in
Euros, a Target Day;

 

“Cash
Collateral Account” means an account in the name of the
Borrower with the Lender at its branch at 45 Akti Miaouli, 185 10 Piraeus,
Greece, designated “RBS re Aegean Marine Petroleum S.A. : Cash Collateral
Account - RBS 575595”, or any other account (with that or another office of the
Lender or with a bank or financial institution other than the Lender)
designated by the Lender as the Cash Collateral Account for the purposes of
this Agreement;

 

“Commitment”
means $50,000,000 or its equivalent in an Optional Currency
or Optional Currencies at any time, as such amount may be reduced, cancelled or
terminated in accordance with this Agreement;

 

“Contractual
Currency” has the meaning given in Clause 19.4;

 

“Customer”
means each person from whom Receivables are due;

 

“Current
Account” means an account in the name of the Borrower with
the Lender at its branch at 45 Akti Miaouli, 185 36 Piraeus, Greece, designated
“Aegean Marine Petroleum S.A. Current Account” or any other account (with that
or another office of the Lender or with a bank or financial institution other
than the Lender) designated by the Lender as the Current Account for the
purposes of this Agreement;

 

“Deed of
Assignment” means the deed of assignment in the form set out
in Appendix A;

 

2

 

“Direct
Credit Substitute” means a letter of credit or bank guarantee
issued or to be issued by the Lender in favour of a Beneficiary in such form as
is agreed between the Lender and the Borrower which is required by the Borrower
in the ordinary course of the Borrower’s business and which is neither a
Documentary L/C nor a Transaction Related Standby L/C;

 

“Documentary
L/C” means a letter of credit issued or to be issued by the
Lender in favour of a Beneficiary in such form as is agreed between the Lender and
the Borrower which directly relates to the purchase of Oil Products by the
Borrower and which imposes on the Lender a primary obligation to pay upon
presentation of specified documents as specified in such letter of credit;

 

“Dollars”
and “$” means the
lawful currency for the time being of the United States of America;

 

“EMU
Legislation” means legislative measures of the Council of the
European Union for the introduction of, changeover to, or operation of, a
single or unified European Currency being part of the implementation of the
Third Stage;

 

“EURIBOR”
means, for any relevant period in the case of an amount
outstanding hereunder in Euros, the rate per annum at which the Lender offers
deposits in Euros to leading banks in the European Interbank Market at or about
11.00 a.m. (Brussels time) on the Quotation Date for that period for a period
equal to that period and for delivery on the first Business Day of it;

 

“Euro” and
“Euros” means, for the time being,
the single currency of Participating Member States as provided in the EMU
Legislations;

 

“Event
of Default” means any of the events or circumstances
described in Clause 17.1;

 

“Expiry
Date” means, in relation to an L/C, the expiry date specified
in the Utilisation Notice relating thereto and initially applicable or, as the
context may require, any extended expiry date requested and agreed to by the
Lender pursuant to Clause 3.8 provided that in no circumstances shall the
expiry date of an L/C be a date falling after the Termination Date;

 

“Facility
Reset Date” has the meaning given in Clause 3.2;

 

“Facility”
means the facility granted pursuant to Clause 2.1;

 

“Facility
Period” means the period commencing on the date of this
Agreement and ending on the date on which the Lender notifies the Borrower
that:

 

(a)                    all amounts
which have become due for payment by the Borrower under this Agreement and the
Security Documents have been paid;

 

(b)                   no amount is
owing or has accrued (without yet having become due for payment) under this
Agreement or the Security Documents;

 

(c)                    there are no
Outstandings;

 

(d)                   the Borrower
has no future or contingent liability under Clauses 18, 19, or 20 or any other
provision of this Agreement or the Security Documents; and

 

(e)                    the Lender
does not consider that there is a significant risk that any payment or
transaction under this Agreement or the Security Documents would be set aside,
or would have to be reversed or adjusted, in any present or possible future

 

3

 

bankruptcy of the Borrower
or in any present or possible future proceeding relating to this Agreement or
the Security Documents;

 

“Financial
Indebtedness” means, in relation to a person (the “debtor”), a liability of the debtor:

 

(a)                    for principal,
interest or any other sum payable in respect of any moneys borrowed or raised
by the debtor;

 

(b)                   under any loan
stock, bond, note or other security issued by the debtor;

 

(c)                    under any
acceptance credit, guarantee or letter of credit facility made available to the
debtor;

 

(d)                   under a
financial lease, a deferred purchase consideration arrangement or any other
agreement having the commercial effect of a borrowing or raising of money by
the debtor;

 

(e)                    under any
foreign exchange transaction, interest or currency swap or any other kind of
derivative transaction entered into by the debtor or, if the agreement under
which any such transaction is entered into requires netting of mutual
liabilities, the liability of the debtor for the net amount; or

 

(f)                      under a
guarantee, indemnity or similar obligation entered into by the debtor in
respect of a liability of another person which would fall within paragraphs (a)
to (e) if the references to the debtor referred to the other person;

 

“First
Amendment Agreement” means the amendment agreement dated 22
June 2005 and made between (i) the Borrower and (ii) the Lender;

 

“Guarantee”
means the guarantee provided by the Guarantor to the Lender
in respect of the Facility, as previously amended and as amended by the
Guarantee Side Letter;

 

“Guarantee
Side Letter” means a letter in a form acceptable to the
Lender and provided by the Guarantor to the Lender on or about the same date as
the Second Amendment Agreement in order to amend the Guarantee as set out
therein;

 

“Guarantor”
means Mr Dimitris Melissanidis, holder of Greek
identification card number X092475, of 42 Hatzikyriakou Street, 18538 Piraeus,
Greece;

 

“Interest
Period” means a period determined in accordance with Clause
8;

 

“Letter
of Credit” or “L/C” means:

 

(a)                    a Documentary
L/C; or

 

(b)                   a Transaction
Related Standby L/C; or

 

(c)                    a Direct
Credit Substitute;

 

“L/C
Issue Request” means, in relation to an L/C, a notice in the
form of Schedule 1 Part B (or in any other form which the Lender approves or
reasonably requires);

 

“L/C
Valuation Date” has the meaning given to that term in Clause
5.1;

 

“LIBOR” means,
for an Interest Period or any other relevant period in the case of an amount
outstanding hereunder in Dollars or in an Optional Current (other than Euros),
the rate per annum at which the Lender offers deposits in Dollars or the
relevant Optional

 

4

 

Currency to leading banks
in the London Interbank Market at or about 11.00 a.m. (London time) on the
Quotation Date for that Interest Period or other period for a period equal to
that Interest Period or other period and for delivery on the first Business Day
of it;

 

“Loan” means
the aggregate principal amount for the time being of all Advances outstanding
under this Agreement;

 

“Mandatory
Cost Rate” means, in relation to the Loan or any overdue
amount referred to in Clause 9:

 

(d)                   the additional
rate of interest calculated in accordance with the provisions of Schedule 3;
and

 

(e)                    the cost
calculated as a percentage rate per annum incurred by the Lender as a result of
compliance with any applicable regulatory or central bank requirements,
including any reserve costs imposed by the European Central Bank or the
European System of Central Banks;

 

“Margin”
means 1.125 per cent. per annum;

 

“Oil
Products” means oil bunkering products and lubricants used in
the maritime industry;

 

“Optional
Currency” means the Euro and any other currency (other than
Dollars) which is acceptable to the Lender and is, for the time being, freely
transferable and convertible into Dollars in the London Foreign Exchange
Market;

 

“Optional
Currency L/C” means an L/C denominated in an Optional
Currency;

 

“Original
Dollar Amount” means, in relation to an L/C, the amount in
Dollars which is, or is to be, outstanding (if denominated in Dollars) or (if
denominated in an Optional Currency) the amount in Dollars which would have
been outstanding if such L/C had first been issued and had remained denominated
in Dollars, reduced from time to time by reductions of such L/C under this
Agreement;

 

“Outstanding
L/C Amount” means, in relation to an L/C, the maximum amount
for which such L/C was issued and, in relation to an Optional Currency L/C, the
amount in Dollars last determined as the Outstanding L/C Amount in accordance
with Clause 5.2, in each case less the aggregate amount of all reductions to
such L/C which have been made in accordance with the provisions of Clause 10;

 

“Outstandings”
means, at any time, the aggregate of the Outstanding L/C
Amounts;

 

“Participating
Member State” means each state so described in any EMU
Legislation;

 

“Payment
Currency” has the meaning given in Clause 19.4;

 

“Pertinent
Jurisdiction”, in relation to a company, means:

 

(a)                    England and
Wales;

 

(b)                   the country
under the laws of which the company is incorporated or formed;

 

(c)                    a country in
which the company’s central management and control is or has recently been
exercised;

 

(d)                   a country in
which the overall net income of the company is subject to corporation tax,
income tax or any similar tax;

 

5

 

(e)                     a country in
which assets of the company (other than securities issued by, or loans to,
related companies) having a substantial value are situated, in which the
company maintains a permanent place of business, or in which a Security
Interest created by the company must or should be registered in order to ensure
its validity or priority; and

 

(f)                       a country
the courts of which have jurisdiction to make a winding up, administration or
similar order in relation to the company or which would have such jurisdiction
if their assistance were requested by the courts of a country referred to in
paragraphs (b) or (c) above;

 

“Potential
Event of Default” means an event or circumstance which, with
the giving of any notice, the lapse of time, a determination of the Lender
and/or the satisfaction of any other condition, would constitute an Event of
Default;

 

“Qualifying
Receivables” means Receivables which, at the relevant time:

 

(f)                       have been
assigned to the Lender pursuant to the Deed of Assignment;

 

(c)                     have been
included in a Schedule of Receivables (or a schedule of Receivables delivered
pursuant to clause 15.14) submitted, together with the copies of documents,
receipt(s) and invoice(s) relating to such Receivables required to be submitted
pursuant to Clause 3.1, to the Lender pursuant to Clause 6.1 (c) and:

 

(d)     (i)                             in
the case of Receivables due in respect of lubricants, are payable within 60
days of the date of the relevant receipt and are not overdue for payment; and

 

(ii)                    in the case of
Receivables due in respect of oil bunkering, are payable within 30 days of the
date of the relevant receipt and are not overdue for payment by more than 15
days;

 

“Quotation
Date means, in relation to any Interest Period (or any other
period for which an interest rate is to be determined under any provision of a
Finance Document):

 

(a)                     in the case
of deposits in Dollars or an Optional Currency (other than Euros), the day on
which quotations would ordinarily be given by leading banks in the London Interbank
Market for deposits in the relevant currency to which such rate is to be
determined for delivery on the first day of that Interest Period or other
period; and

 

(b)                    in the case of
deposits in Euros, the Target Day on which quotations would ordinarily be given
by leading banks in the European Interbank Market for deposits in Euros for
delivery on the first day of that Interest Period or other period;

 

“Receivables”
means sums due and owing by Customers to the Borrower in
respect of oil bunkering and/or lubricant sales;

 

“Reference
Rate” means:

 

(a)                     in relation
to Advances, and to any amount outstanding hereunder and denominated in Dollars
or in an Optional Currency (other than Euros), LIBOR; and

 

(b)                    in relation to
Advances, and to any amount outstanding hereunder and denominated in Euros,
EURIBOR;

 

6

 

“Renewal
Date” means the date which is the first anniversary of the
Effective Date (as defined in the Second Amendment Agreement), and thereafter
each subsequent anniversary of such date;

 

“Schedule
of Receivables” means a Schedule in the form of the Schedule
to the Deed of Assignment (or in such other form as the Lender may approve) and
submitted or to be submitted to the Lender pursuant to Clause 3.1;

 

“Second
Amendment Agreement” means the amendment agreement dated [•]
2006 and made between (i) the Borrower and (ii) the Lender;

 

“Security
Documents” means:

 

(g)                   the Deed of
Assignment;

 

(h)                   any Schedule of
Receivables (and any schedule of Receivables delivered pursuant to Clause
15.14);

 

(i)                       the Account
Security Document;

 

(j)                       the
Additional Account Security Document;

 

(k)                    the Guarantee,
as amended by the Guarantee Side Letter; and

 

(1)                    any other
documents designated as such by the parties hereto;

 

“Security
Interest” means:

 

(a)                    a mortgage,
charge (whether fixed or floating), pledge, lien or any other security interest
of any kind; and

 

(b)                   any arrangement
entered into by a person (A) the effect of which is to place another person (B)
in a position which is similar, in economic terms, to the position in which B
would have been had he held a security interest over an asset of A; but this
paragraph (b) does not apply to a right of set off or combination of accounts
conferred by the standard terms of business of a bank or financial institution;

 

“Settlement
Amount” means, in relation to each demand made under an L/C,
the amount payable by the Lender to the Beneficiary in respect of such demand,
in Dollars or, in the case of an L/C issued in an Optional Currency, in such
Optional Currency;

 

“Settlement
Date” means, in relation to each demand made under an L/C,
the date on which payment of the Settlement Amount is due to the Beneficiary in
respect of the demand;

 

“Target
Day” means a day on which the Trans-European Automated Real
Time Gross Settlement Express Transfer System is open;

 

“Termination
Date” means the date on which the Facility terminates in
accordance with Clause 2.3;

 

“Third
Stage” means the third stage of European economic and
monetary union pursuant to the Treaty on European Union;

 

“Transaction
Related Standby L/C” means a letter of credit or bank
guarantee issued or to be issued by the Lender in favour of a Beneficiary in
such form as is agreed between the Lender and the Borrower which relates
directly to the purchase of Oil Products by the

 

7

 

Borrower and which
imposes on the Lender an obligation to pay (a) only upon default in payment by
the Borrower under its contract with the supplier of such Oil Products and (b)
upon presentation of specified documents as specified in such letter of credit
or bank guarantee;

 

“Treaty
on European Union” means the Treaty of Rome of 25 March 1957,
as amended by the Single European Act 1986 and the Maastricht Treaty of 7 February
1992;

 

“Utilisation”
means any utilisation of the Facility by the Borrower,
whether by way of:

 

(m)                 the issue by the
Lender of an L/C; or

 

(e)                    the making by
the Lender of an Advance;

 

“Utilisation
Date” means, in relation to each Utilisation, the date
requested by the Borrower for the Utilisation to be made or (as the context
requires) the date on which the Utilisation is actually made; and

 

“Utilisation
Notice” means a notice in the form set out in Schedule 1 Part
A or Part B (as relevant) or in any other form which the Lender approves or
reasonably requires.

 

1.2                  Construction of
certain terms. In this Agreement, a reference to:

 

“asset”
includes every kind of property, asset, interest or right, including any
present, future or contingent right to any revenues or other payment;

 

“claims” and “losses” includes:

 

(a)                    any claim or
demand, including any in the nature of or asserted as a total or partial
defence, abatement, set-off or counterclaim;

 

(b)                   any legal or
administrative action; and

 

(c)                    any loss,
liability or expense,

 

including (in all cases
covered by paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)) any item which relates to tax and any
item the amount or final amount of which remains open or unknown;

 

“company”
includes any partnership, joint venture and unincorporated
association;

 

“contingent
liability” means a liability which is not certain to arise
and/or the amount of which remains unascertained;

 

“date of
this Agreement” means the date on which this Agreement comes
into effect pursuant to the Second Amendment Agreement;

 

“demand”
includes any requirement to make payment in accordance with
the terms of an L/C;

 

“document”
includes a deed; also a letter, fax or telex;

 

“expense”
means any kind of cost, charge or expense (including all
legal costs, charges and expenses and cost of business class travel) and any
applicable value added or other tax;

 

“law” includes
any order or decree, any form of delegated legislation, any treaty or
international convention and any regulation, directive or decision of the
Council of the European Union or the European Commission;

 

8

 

“legal
or administrative action” means any legal proceeding or
arbitration and any administrative or regulatory action or investigation;

 

“liability”
includes every kind of debt or liability (present or future,
certain or contingent), whether incurred as principal or surety or otherwise,
and where any person is under an obligation to guarantee a liability, or to
indemnify or hold another person harmless in respect of it, such obligations
shall exist notwithstanding that the relevant liability has not been paid or
discharged by the person entitled to or claiming the benefit of the guarantee,
indemnity or hold harmless obligation as the case may be;

 

“months”
shall be construed in accordance with Clause 1.3;

 

“official
consent” and “official
requirement” shall include respectively:

 

(a)                    any consent,
authorisation or clearance; and

 

(b)                   any
requirement, directive, request, guideline or notice (whether general or
specific and whether or not having the force of law);

 

of or issued by any
fiscal, monetary or banking authority or any other governmental, official or
public authority of any kind, including the Council of the European Union or
the European Commission; and “official requirement” also includes a resolution
of the United Nations or of its Security Council;

 

“person”
includes any company, any state, political sub-division of a
state and local or municipal authority and any international organisation;

 

“regulation”
includes any regulation, rule, official directive, request or
guideline (either having the force of law or compliance with which is
reasonable in the ordinary course of business of the party concerned) of any
governmental body, agency, department or regulatory, self-regulatory or other
authority or organisation;

 

“successor”
includes any person who is entitled (by assignment, novation,
merger or otherwise) to any other person’s rights under this Agreement or the
Security Documents (or any interest in those rights) or who, as administrator,
liquidator or otherwise, is entitled to exercise those rights; and in
particular references to a successor include a person to whom those rights (or
any interest in those rights) are transferred or pass as a result of a merger,
division, reconstruction or other reorganisation of it or any other person; and

 

“tax” includes
any present or future tax, duty, impost, levy or charge of any kind which is
imposed by any state, any political sub-division of a state or any local or
municipal authority (including any such imposed in connection with exchange
controls), and any connected penalty, interest or fine.

 

1.3                  Meaning of
“month”. A period of one or more “months”
ends on the day in the relevant calendar month numerically corresponding
to the day of the calendar month in which the period started (“the numerically corresponding day”), but:

 

(a)                     on the
Business Day following the numerically corresponding day if the numerically
corresponding day is not a Business Day or, if there is no later Business Day
in the same calendar month, on the Business Day preceding the numerically
corresponding day; or

 

(b)                    on the last
Business Day in the relevant calendar month, if the period started on the last
Business Day in a calendar month or if the last calendar month of the period
has no numerically corresponding day;

 

and “month” and “monthly” shall be construed accordingly.

 

9

 

1.4                  General
interpretation. In this Agreement:

 

(a)                     references to,
or to a provision of, this Agreement, the Security Documents or any other
document are references to it as amended or supplemented, whether before the
date of this Agreement or otherwise;

 

(b)                    references to,
or to a provision of, any law include any amendment, extension, reenactment or
replacement, whether made before the date of this Agreement or otherwise;

 

(c)                     words
denoting the singular number shall include the plural and vice versa;

 

(d)                    Clauses 1.1 to
1.3 and the foregoing provisions of this Clause 1.4 apply unless the contrary
intention appears; and

 

(e)                     references in
Clause 1.1 to a document being in the form of a particular Appendix include
references to that form with any modifications to that form which the Lender
approves or reasonably requires.

 

1.5                  Headings. In interpreting this Agreement or
the Security Documents, all clause, sub-clause and other headings in this
Agreement or the Security Documents shall be entirely disregarded.

 

1.6                  Exclusion of
restrictive principles of interpretation. Any principle requiring any
provision of this Agreement or the Security Documents (including this Clause
1.6) to be construed narrowly or against the Lender is excluded.

 

1.7                  Meaning of
“subsidiary” and “holding company”. A company (S) is a subsidiary of another
company (P) if:

 

(a)                     a majority of
the issued shares in S (or a majority of the issued shares in S which carry
unlimited rights to capital and income distributions) are directly owned by P
or are indirectly attributable to P; or

 

(b)                    P has direct
or indirect control over a majority of the voting rights attaching to the
issued shares of S; or

 

(c)                     P has the
direct or indirect power to appoint or remove a majority of the directors of S;
or

 

(d)                    P otherwise
has the direct or indirect power to ensure that the affairs of S are conducted
in accordance with the wishes of P;

 

and any company of which
S is a subsidiary is a holding company of S.

 

2                            FACILITY

 

2.1                  Amount of
Facility. Subject to the other provisions of this Agreement, the Lender
shall make a revolving credit and letter of credit issuance and refinancing
facility not exceeding $50,000,000 or the equivalent thereof in Optional
Currencies available to the Borrower for the Availability Period.

 

2.2                  Purpose of
Facility. The Borrower undertakes with the Lender to use each Utilisation
only for the purpose stated in the preamble to this Agreement.

 

2.3                  Termination. Unless renewed in accordance
with Clause 2.4, the Facility shall terminate on the next Renewal Date.

 

2.4                  Renewal. If
the Lender shall have received at least 45 Business Days’ prior written notice
from the Borrower requesting renewal of the Facility, such notice to expire on
the

 

10

 

next Renewal Date, it
shall give written notice to the Borrower no later than 5 Business Days prior
to such Renewal Date either, at its sole and absolute discretion, agreeing to
renew or rejecting the Borrower’s request for renewal. If the Lender agrees to
renew, the Facility shall continue until the following Renewal Date.

 

2.5                  Increase in
Facility. The Borrower may request that the Lender increase the amount of
the Commitment by giving at least 45 Business Days’ prior written notice to the
Lender, such notice to expire on the next Renewal Date, specifying the
additional amount requested. The Lender shall give written notice to the
Borrower no later than 5 Business Days prior to such Renewal Date either, at
its sole and absolute discretion, agreeing to so increase the Commitment or
rejecting the Borrower’s request.

 

3                            UTILISATION

 

3.1                  Submission of
Schedule of Receivables. On each Facility Reset Date the Borrower shall
submit to the Lender:

 

(a)                     a Schedule of
Receivables duly executed as a deed by the Borrower and setting out details of
Receivables in respect of which the Borrower may wish to submit Utilisation
Notices, provided that:

 

(i)                       no more
than 5 per cent. of the aggregate of all such Receivables set out in such
Schedule of Receivables shall be due from any one Customer (except the United
States Navy); and

 

(ii)                    such Receivables
shall not have been contained in a Schedule of Receivables previously delivered
under this Agreement;

 

(b)                    in respect of
each Receivable contained in a Schedule of Receivables submitted to the Lender
under Clause 3.1(a), a copy of the bunkering confirmation issued by the
Borrower to the relevant Customer together with a copy of the Customer’s
confirmation of such bunkering confirmation, together evidencing the contract
entered into between the Borrower and the Customer in relation to such Receivable
and complying with the following requirements:

 

(i)                       such
bunkering confirmation when read together with the relevant Customer’s
confirmation shall include, whether expressly or by incorporation, all the
terms of such contract between the Borrower and the Customer;

 

(ii)                    in the case of
Receivables relating to oil bunkers and/or lubricants supplied to the Customer
by the Borrower or its employees, such bunkering confirmation when read
together with the relevant Customer’s confirmation shall refer to and incorporate
the Borrower’s standard terms and conditions;

 

(iii)                 in the case of
Receivables relating to oil bunkers and/or lubricants supplied to the Customer
by any parties other than the Borrower or its employees, such bunkering
confirmation shall contain the following wording:

 

“AMP’s
standard terms and conditions to apply, except as regards operational matters
at the place of delivery, in relation to which supplier’s terms and conditions
shall apply”;

 

(c)                     in respect of
each Receivable contained in a Schedule of Receivables submitted to the Lender
under Clause 3.1(a), a copy of the receipt for the oil bunkers and/or
lubricants supplied (as relevant) complying with the following requirements:

 

(i)                       such
receipt shall have been duly signed by the master or chief engineer on behalf
of the vessel to which the Borrower has supplied such oil bunkers and/or

 

11

 

lubricants (as relevant)
as evidence of the relevant Customer’s irrevocable payment obligations, free
from any rights of set-off or other deduction;

 

(ii)                    in the case of
oil bunkering receipts or lubricant sales receipts issued by any parties other
than the Borrower or its employees, such receipt shall:

 

(A)                 contain an
express acknowledgement to the effect that the relevant third party has
supplied the relevant Receivables to the Customer for and on behalf of the
Borrower; and

 

(B)                   set out the
number of the relevant bunkering confirmation to which such receipt relates;

 

(iii)                 in the case of
oil bunkering receipts, such receipt shall be dated no more than 45 days before
the relevant Utilisation Date and shall have a payment tenor of no more than 30
days;

 

(iv)                in the case of
lubricant sales receipts, such receipt shall be dated no more than 60 days
before the relevant Utilisation Date and shall have a payment tenor of no more
than 60 days;

 

(d)                    for each copy
of a receipt delivered under Clause 3.1(c), a certificate duly signed by an
officer of the Borrower, certifying that the copy of the relevant receipt is
true and up to date;

 

(e)                     for each copy
of a receipt delivered under Clause 3.1(c), a carbon copy of the relevant
invoice issued to the relevant Customer, complying with the following
requirements:

 

(i)                       in the case
of oil bunkering invoices, such invoice shall have a payment tenor of no more
than 30 days as of the date of the relevant receipt; and

 

(ii)                    in the case of
lubricant sales invoices, such invoice shall have a payment tenor of no more
than 60 days as of the date of the relevant receipt.

 

3.2                  Facility Reset
Date. The first Facility Reset Date shall be the date on which the Borrower
delivers to the Lender the first Schedule of Receivables and each subsequent
Facility Reset Date shall be the day (the “numerically corresponding day”) in
each subsequent calendar month during the Availability Period numerically
corresponding to the day in the relevant calendar month which was the first
Facility Reset Date, but if the numerically corresponding day is not a Business
Day, the subsequent Facility Reset Date shall be on the Business Day following
the numerically corresponding day or, if there is no later Business Day in the
same calendar month, the Business Day preceding the numerically corresponding
day, but so that in the next following month the Facility Reset Date shall
revert to the numerically corresponding day.

 

3.3                  Utilisation
(L/C). Subject to the fulfilment of the conditions precedent contained in
Clause 6 and the conditions contained in Clause 3.4, the Borrower may request a
Utilisation to be made by way of issuance of an L/C by ensuring that the Lender
receives a completed Utilisation Notice not later than 11.00 a.m. (Piraeus
time) 2 Business Days prior to the intended Utilisation Date.

 

3.4                  Availability
(L/C). The conditions referred to in Clause 3.3 are that:

 

(a)                     a Utilisation
Date has to be a Business Day during the Availability Period;

 

(b)                    each L/C shall
be denominated in Dollars or in an Optional Currency;

 

12

 

(c)                     the Original
Dollar Amount of a Utilisation shall be not less than $1,000,000 (or such other
amount as is agreed by the Lender) or such other amount as is available in
accordance with Clause 3.4(d);

 

(d)                    subject to
Clause 3.7, the aggregate of the Aggregate Liabilities and the Utilisation then
to be made shall not exceed the lower of:

 

(i)                       the
Commitment; and

 

(ii)                    the aggregate
of:

 

(A)                 80 per cent. of
the face value of the aggregate of all Qualifying Receivables which are
included in the latest Schedule of Receivables submitted to the Lender pursuant
to Clause 6.1(c); and

 

(B)                   the sum then
standing to the credit of the Cash Collateral Account; and

 

(e)                     each L/C
shall specify an Expiry Date and that Expiry Date shall be a date falling not
later than the Termination Date.

 

3.5                  Utilisation
Notice irrevocable (L/C). Each Utilisation Notice must be signed by a duly
authorised signatory of the Borrower and, once served, the Utilisation Notice
cannot be revoked without the prior consent of the Lender.

 

3.6                  Disbursement of
Utilisation (L/C). Subject to the provisions of this Agreement, the Lender
shall on each Utilisation Date issue the relevant L/C to the relevant
Beneficiary.

 

3.7                  Weighting of
Optional Currency L/Cs. For the purposes of Clauses 3.4(d), 3.8(d),
3.10(d), 13.2(c), 13.10(a)(ii) and 15.15, the Outstanding L/C Amount of each
Optional Currency L/C and the Original Dollar Amount of any Utilisation
consisting of an Optional Currency L/C shall be multiplied by 110%.

 

3.8                  Extension of
Expiry Date. The Borrower may, by notice in writing to the Lender signed by
a duly authorised signatory of the Borrower not later than 11.00 a.m. (Piraeus
time) 5 Business Days prior to the Expiry Date of an L/C, request that such
Expiry Date be extended. Subject to compliance with the following conditions:

 

(a)                     the extended
Expiry Date shall be a date falling not later than the Termination Date;

 

(b)                    no Event of
Default of Potential Event of Default has occurred and is continuing as at the
date on which such extension is implemented;

 

(c)                     the
representations and warranties in Clause 14.1 and those (if any) in the
Security Documents would be true and not misleading if repeated on the date of
the request for extension; and

 

(d)                    the Lender is
satisfied that the test contained in Clause 3.4(d) would not then or in the
future to be breached by reason of the requested extension,

 

the Lender shall agree to
and implement such request by amending and re-issuing the relevant LC.

 

3.9                  Utilisation
(Advance). Subject to the fulfilment of the conditions precedent contained
in Clause 6 and the conditions contained in Clause 3.10, the Borrower may
request a Utilisation to be made by way of the making of an Advance by ensuring
that the Lender receives a completed Utilisation Notice not later than 11:00
a.m. (Piraeus time) 2 Business Days prior to the intended Utilisation Date.

 

13

 

3.10           Availability (Advance).
The conditions referred to in Clause 3.9 are that:

 

(a)                     a Utilisation
Date has to be a Business Day during the Availability Period;

 

(b)                    each Advance
shall be denominated in Dollars;

 

(c)                     the amount of
a Utilisation shall not be less than $2,500,000 (or such other amount as is
agreed by the Lender) or such other amount as is available in accordance with
Clause 3.4(d) as applied by Clause 3.10(d); and

 

(d)                    the test
contained in Clause 3.4(d) would not be breached by giving effect to the
requested Utilisation.

 

3.11           Utilisation Notice
irrevocable (Advance). Each Utilisation Notice must be signed by a duly
authorised signatory of the Borrower and, once served, the Utilisation Notice
cannot be revoked without the prior consent of the Lender.

 

3.12           Disbursement of
Utilisation (Advance). Subject to the provisions of this Agreement, the
Lender shall on such Utilisation Date make the relevant Advance to the Borrower
and payment to the Borrower of the Advance shall be made to the account which
the Borrower specifies in the Utilisation Notice.

 

4                            SELECTION
OF OPTIONAL CURRENCIES FOR L/CS

 

4.1                  Selection of
Optional Currency. If an L/C is to be issued in an Optional Currency, the
Borrower shall specify such Optional Currency in the relevant Utilisation
Notice submitted in accordance with Clause 3.3.

 

4.2                  Failure to
select. If the Borrower fails to specify an Optional Currency, it shall be
deemed to have specified Dollars for the L/C concerned.

 

5                            AMOUNT
OF OPTIONAL CURRENCIES

 

5.1                  Lender’s spot
rate of exchange. In this Clause 5, the “Lender’s
spot rate of exchange” means the Lender’s rate of exchange for the
purchase in the London Foreign Exchange Market of the appropriate amount of the
relevant Optional Currency with Dollars at or about 11.00 a.m. on, as the case
may be, each Utilisation Date on which an Optional Currency L/C is to be issued
or on which a previously issued Optional Currency L/C remains outstanding, the
Settlement Date of an Optional Currency L/C and each Facility Reset Date, as
relevant (each an “L/C Valuation Date”).

 

5.2                  Valuation of
Optional Currency L/Cs. On each L/C Valuation Date the Lender shall
determine:

 

(a)                     in the case
of a Utilisation Date, the Outstanding L/C Amount of each Optional Currency L/C
then outstanding or to be issued on that L/C Valuation Date;

 

(b)                    in the case of
a Settlement Date, the Outstanding L/C Amount of each relevant Optional
Currency L/C; and

 

(c)                     in the case
of a Facility Reset Date, the Outstanding L/C Amount of each Optional Currency
L/C then outstanding, by converting the amount of such L/C in the Optional
Currency into Dollars on the basis of the Lender’s spot rate of exchange.

 

5.3                  Notification of
rates and amounts. The Lender shall promptly notify the Borrower of the
Lender’s spot rate of exchange (as to which the Lender’s determination shall,
in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive) and of Outstanding L/C Amounts
hereunder as soon as they are ascertained.

 

14

 

 

6         CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

6.1      Documents, fees and no default. The Lender’s
obligation to make a Utilisation is subject to the following conditions
precedent:

 

(a)       that,
on or before the service of the first Utilisation Notice, the Lender receives
the documents described in Schedule 2 in form and substance satisfactory to it
and its lawyers;

 

(b)       that,
on or before the service of the first Utilisation Notice, the Lender receives
the arrangement fee referred to in Clause 18.1(a), all accrued commitment fees
payable pursuant to Clause 18.1(d) and has received payment of the expenses
referred to in Clause 18.2 if they have, prior thereto, been demanded;

 

(c)       that,
on the Facility Reset Date immediately preceding each Utilisation Notice, the
Lender received a Schedule of Receivables together with all other documentation
required to be provided under Clause 3.1 complying in all respects with Clause
3.1;

 

(d)       that
both at the date of each Utilisation Notice and at each Utilisation Date:

 

(i)        no
Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred and is continuing
or would result from the borrowing of the Advance or the issue of the L/C;

 

(ii)       the
representations and warranties in Clause 14.1 and those (if any) in the
Security Documents would be true and not misleading if repeated on each of
those dates with reference to the circumstances then existing;

 

(e)       that
the Lender has received, and found to be acceptable to it, any further
opinions, consents, agreements and documents in connection with this Agreement
or the Security Documents which the Lender may request by notice to the
Borrower prior to the relevant Utilisation Date.

 

6.2      Waivers of conditions precedent. If the
Lender, at its discretion, permits a Utilisation to be made before certain of
the conditions referred to in Clause 6.1 are satisfied, the Borrower shall
ensure that those conditions are satisfied within 5 Business Days after the
Utilisation Date (or such longer period as the Lender may specify).

 

7         INTEREST

 

7.1      Payment of normal interest. Subject to the
provisions of this Agreement, interest on:

 

(a)       each
Advance; and

 

(b)       the
Loan,

 

shall be paid by the
Borrower on the Facility Reset Date in respect of (i) the Interest Period in
respect of such Advance or the Loan ending on that Facility Reset Date and (ii)
each other Interest Period (if any) in respect of such Advance or the Loan
commencing on or after the immediately preceding Facility Reset Date.

 

7.2      Normal Rate of Interest. Subject to the
provisions of this Agreement, the rate of interest on:

 

(a)       each
Advance; and

 

(b)       the
Loan,

 

15

 

in each case in respect
of each Interest Period applicable to it, shall be the aggregate of the Margin,
the Reference Rate and the Mandatory Cost Rate for that Interest Period.

 

8         INTEREST PERIODS

 

8.1      Commencement of Interest Periods.

 

(a)       The
first Interest Period in respect of each Advance shall commence on the relevant
Utilisation Date or, in the case of an Advance pursuant to Clause 11.2(b), on
the relevant Settlement Date and shall end:

 

(i)        on
the same day as the then current Interest Period in respect of the Loan
(excluding such Advance); or

 

(ii)       if
such Advance is the only Advance then outstanding, on the last day of the
Interest Period determined under Clause 8.2.

 

(b)       On
the expiry of the first Interest Period in respect of each Advance, such
Advance shall be amalgamated with the Loan (excluding such Advance) for the
purposes of calculation of interest and determination of Interest Periods.

 

(c)       Each
subsequent Interest Period shall commence on the expiry of the previous
Interest Period.

 

8.2      Duration of Interest Periods. Subject to
Clause 8.3, each Interest Period in respect of an Advance or, as the case may
be, the Loan (excluding such Advance) shall be one week or one month as
selected by the Lender and notified by it to the Borrower not later than 2
Business Days after the commencement of each Interest Period, provided that, if
a Facility Reset Date would otherwise occur during an Interest Period, such
Interest Period shall be the period commencing on the expiry of the previous
Interest Period and ending on such Facility Reset Date.

 

8.3      No Interest Period to extend beyond Termination
Date. No Interest Period shall end after the Termination Date and any
Interest Period which would otherwise extend beyond the Termination Date shall
instead end on the Termination Date.

 

9         DEFAULT INTEREST

 

9.1      Payment of default interest on overdue amounts. The
Borrower shall pay interest in accordance with the following provisions of this
Clause 9 on any amount payable by the Borrower under this Agreement which the
Lender does not receive on or before the relevant
date, that is:

 

(a)       the
date on which this Agreement provides that such amount is due for payment; or

 

(b)       where
this Agreement provides that such amount is payable on demand, the date on
which the demand is served; or

 

(c)       if
such amount has become immediately due and payable under Clause 17.4, the date
on which it became immediately due and payable.

 

9.2      Default rate of interest. Interest shall
accrue on an overdue amount from (and including) the relevant date until the
date of actual payment (as well after as before judgment) at the rate per annum
determined by the Lender to be 2 per cent. above:

 

(a)       in
the case of an overdue amount of principal, the higher of the rates set out at
paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause 9.3; or

 

16

 

(b)       in
the case of any other overdue amount, the rate set out at paragraph (b) of
Clause 9.3.

 

9.3      Calculation of default rate of interest. The
rates referred to in Clause 9.2 are:

 

(a)       the
rate applicable to the overdue principal amount immediately prior to the
relevant date (but only for any unexpired part of any then current Interest
Period);

 

(b)       the
Margin plus, in respect of successive periods of any duration (including at
call) up to 3 months which the Lender may select from time to time:

 

(i)        the
Reference Rate and the Mandatory Cost Rate; or

 

(ii)       if
the Lender determines that deposits of Dollars or, as the case may be, the
relevant Optional Currency for any such period are not being made available to
it by leading banks in the London Interbank Market in the ordinary course of
business, a rate from time to time determined by the Lender by reference to the
cost of funds to it from such other sources as the Lender may from time to time
determine plus the Mandatory Cost Rate.

 

9.4      Notification of interest periods and default
rates. The Lender shall promptly notify the Borrower of each interest rate
determined by it under Clause 9.3 and of each period selected by it for the
purposes of paragraph (b) of that Clause; but this shall not be taken to imply
that the Borrower is liable to pay such interest only with effect from the date
of the Lender’s notification.

 

9.5      Payment of accrued default interest. Subject
to the other provisions of this Agreement, any interest due under this Clause
shall be paid on the last day of the period by reference to which it was
determined.

 

9.6      Compounding of default
interest. Any such interest which is not paid at the end of the period by
reference to which it was determined shall thereupon be compounded.

 

10       REDUCTION OF LETTERS OF CREDIT

 

10.1    Reduction of Outstanding L/C Amounts. The
Outstanding L/C Amount of an L/C shall not be treated as reduced for the
purposes of this Agreement unless and until:

 

(a)       the
Lender has received a written confirmation from the Beneficiary of such L/C of
the amount of such reduction; or

 

(b)       the
Lender has notified the Borrower in writing that (notwithstanding the absence
of a written confirmation from the Beneficiary of such L/C) it is satisfied
that its liability under the L/C has been irrevocably reduced or discharged; or

 

(c)       the
amount of the L/C irrevocably and unconditionally reduces in accordance with
its terms; or

 

(d)       the
expiry date of the L/C elapses and the Lender has notified the Borrower in
writing that it is satisfied that no claim or demand has been made, or may
thereafter be made, under the L/C.

 

10.2    Reduction of Outstandings. If the Outstanding
L/C Amount of an L/C has been reduced pursuant to Clause 10.1 above, the
Outstandings shall be reduced by an equal amount.

 

11       SETTLEMENT OF LETTERS OF CREDIT

 

11.1    Notification of Settlement Amounts. The Lender
shall, immediately after receiving a demand from, or after being notified by, a
Beneficiary that it is required to make payment

 

17

 

under an L/C, notify the
Borrower that such payment is due and of the Settlement Amount and the
Settlement Date.

 

11.2    Borrower’s settlement. The Borrower shall
immediately after notification from the Lender under Clause 11.1, notify the
Lender:

 

(a)       that
it will reimburse the Settlement Amount, whereupon it shall pay to the Lender
on the Settlement Date the Settlement Amount in Dollars or, if the relevant L/C
was issued in an Optional Currency, in such Optional Currency; or

 

(b)       that
it wishes to refinance the Settlement Amount, whereupon, subject to the
satisfaction of the conditions precedent contained in Clause 3.4(d) (as applied
by Clause 3.10(d)) and Clause 6.1(d)(i) and (ii), the Lender shall be deemed to
have made an Advance to the Borrower on the Settlement Date in Dollars in the
principal amount equal to:

 

(i)        such
Settlement Amount (in the case of an L/C issued in Dollars); or

 

(ii)       such
Settlement Amount converted into Dollars on the basis of the Lender’s spot rate
of exchange on such Settlement Date (in the case of an L/C issued in an
Optional Currency).

 

11.3    Borrower’s failure to settle. If the Borrower
fails to notify the Lender on or prior to the Settlement Date pursuant to
Clause 11.2, the Borrower shall be deemed to have delivered a notice in
accordance with Clause 11.2(b) provided that if the conditions precedent
referred to in Clause 11.2(b) are not satisfied the foregoing provisions of
this Clause 11.3 shall not apply and the Borrower shall be obliged to reimburse
the Settlement Amount on the Settlement Date in accordance with Clause 11.2(a).

 

12       INDEMNITY OF THE BORROWER

 

12.1    Borrower’s undertaking to indemnify. The
Borrower agrees that it shall:

 

(a)       pay
to the Lender upon demand by the Lender an amount equal to each amount paid by
the Lender to a Beneficiary under any L/C and which is not:

 

(i)        otherwise
fully reimbursed, paid or repaid by the Borrower under this Agreement; or

 

(ii)       refinanced
in accordance with Clause 11.2(b);

 

(b)       indemnify,
as a principal and independent debtor, the Lender on demand against all
actions, claims, demands, liabilities, costs, losses, damages and expenses
incurred, suffered or sustained or any penalty or other expenditure which may
result or which the Lender may incur, suffer or sustain in connection with or
arising out of or in relation to any L/C Obligations and/or the payment under
or other performance of an L/C.

 

12.2    Letter of Credit payments. The Borrower:

 

(a)       irrevocably
authorises the Lender to make any payment demanded from it pursuant to an L/C
if that demand is made in accordance with its terms;

 

(b)       accepts
that any demand for payment made by the Beneficiary pursuant to an L/C and
which is made in accordance with its terms shall be conclusive evidence that
the Lender was liable to make payment under that L/C and any payment which the
Lender makes pursuant to any such demand shall be accepted by the Borrower as
binding upon the Borrower; and

 

18

 

(c)       acknowledges
and agrees that the Lender shall not in any circumstances whatsoever be liable
to the Borrower in respect of any loss or damage suffered by the Borrower by
reason of the Lender making a payment to the Beneficiary in connection with any
payment demanded under an L/C.

 

12.3    Continuing indemnities. The liabilities and
obligations of the Borrower under the indemnities set out in Clause 12.1 shall
remain in force as a continuing security until:

 

(a)       the
full, prompt and complete performance of all the terms of such indemnities
including the proper and valid payment of all amounts that may become due to
the Lender under this Clause 12.3; and

 

(b)       subject
to Clause 12.4, an absolute discharge or release of the Borrower signed by the
Lender;

 

and accordingly the
Borrower shall not have, as regards those indemnities, any of the rights or
defences of a surety.

 

12.4    Discharges. Any such discharge or release
referred to in Clause 12.3, and any composition or arrangement which the
Borrower may effect with the Lender, shall be deemed to be made subject to the
condition that it will be void if any payment or security which the Lender may
previously have received or may thereafter receive is set aside under any
applicable law or proves to have been for any reason invalid.

 

12.5    No impairment. Without limiting the generality
of Clauses 12.3 and 12.4, the Borrower shall neither be discharged from any of
its liabilities or obligations under Clause 12.1 by, nor have any claim against
the Lender in respect of:

 

(a)       any
misrepresentation or non-disclosure respecting the affairs or condition of the
Lender made to the Borrower by any person; or

 

(b)       a
Beneficiary and/or the Lender releasing or granting any time or any indulgence
whatsoever or making any settlement, composition or arrangement with the
Borrower, a Beneficiary, the Guarantor or any other person; or

 

(c)       a
Beneficiary and/or the Lender asserting or pursuing, failing or neglecting to
assert or pursue, or delaying in asserting or pursuing, or waiving, any of
their rights or remedies against the Borrower, a Beneficiary, the Guarantor or
any other person; or

 

(d)       a
Beneficiary and/or the Lender and/or the Borrower, with the consent of the
Borrower (or with or without the consent of the Borrower in the case of any
variation agreed between a Beneficiary and the Borrower or the person whose
obligations are guaranteed thereby), making, whether expressly or by conduct,
any variation to any L/C Obligations or an L/C; or

 

(e)       a
Beneficiary and/or the Lender and/or the Borrower:

 

(i)        taking,
accepting, varying, dealing with, enforcing, abstaining from enforcing,
surrendering or releasing any security in relation to a Beneficiary or the
Lender or the Borrower or any other person in such manner as it or they think
fit; or

 

(ii)       claiming,
proving for, accepting or transferring any payment in respect of the
obligations and liabilities of the Borrower and/or a Beneficiary relative to
any L/C Obligations or under this Agreement in any composition by, or winding
up of, the Borrower and/or any third party or abstaining from so claiming,
proving, accepting or transferring; or

 

19

 

(f)        any
assignment or transfer by a Beneficiary of, or any succession to, any of its
rights relative to any L/C Obligations or an L/C.

 

12.6    Provision of cash collateral security.
Forthwith upon, or at any time following:

 

(a)       the
occurrence of an Event of Default; or

 

(b)       the
service of a notice under Clause 21.1,

 

then in any such
circumstances the Lender shall be entitled (but not obliged) to demand payment
by the Borrower of, and the Borrower forthwith upon such demand shall pay to
the Lender for credit to the Cash Collateral Account, such amount as shall be
the aggregate of:

 

(i)        any
Settlement Amount then due from the Borrower to the Lender but not settled in
accordance with Clause 11.2(a); and

 

(ii)       the
Outstandings.

 

Such payment shall be
made:

 

(A)      in
Dollars, in the case of any Settlement Amount and the Outstandings; and

 

(B)      in
the relevant Optional Currency, in the case of any Settlement Amount which is
outstanding in an Optional Currency.

 

12.7    Application of cash collateral security. Moneys
received by the Lender pursuant to Clause 12.6 shall be applied (as between the
Borrower on the one hand and the Lender on the other) in the following manner:

 

(a)       first,
in or towards payment of any Settlement Amount then due from the Borrower to the
Lender pursuant to Clause 11.2(a) and not reimbursed;

 

(b)       secondly,
in payment to the Lender for application from time to time by it (and the
Borrower hereby irrevocably authorises the Lender so to apply any such moneys)
in or towards payment of, or reimbursement to the Lender for, any amount which
the Lender shall or may at any time and from time to time thereafter pay or be
or become liable to pay to a Beneficiary under or pursuant to or in connection
with an L/C (including any amount payable under Clause 12.8); and

 

(c)       thirdly,
in or towards payment of all other sums which may be owing to the Lender under
or in connection with an L/C.

 

12.8    Negotiation with Beneficiaries after Event of
Default. The Borrower:

 

(a)       irrevocably
authorises the Lender to negotiate with any Beneficiary at any time after the
occurrence of any Event of Default or Potential Event of Default with a view to
arranging for the prepayment by the Lender, for the account of the Borrower of
any L/C Obligations; and

 

(b)       agrees
that at any time after the occurrence of any Event of Default or Potential
Event of Default the Lender shall be entitled (but not, so far as the Borrower
is concerned, bound) to pay to a Beneficiary, in such manner and upon such
terms as the Lender and the Beneficiary shall agree, any L/C Obligations.

 

20

 

13       REPAYMENT, PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

13.1    Repayment of Loan. The Loan shall be repaid as
provided in Clauses 13.2, 13.3 and 13.4.

 

13.2    Application of the Cash Collateral Account. On
each Facility Reset Date the Lender shall apply the whole of the amount
standing to the credit of the Cash Collateral Account (excluding any amounts
resulting from a payment under Clause 12.6):

 

(a)       FIRST:
in or towards repayment of the Loan and payment of interest on the Loan due on
such Facility Reset Date as provided in Clause 7.1;

 

(b)       SECONDLY:
in or towards satisfaction of any other amounts then due and payable under this
Agreement in such order of application and/or such proportions as the Lender
may specify by notice to the Borrower;

 

(c)       THIRDLY:
if, subject to Clause 3.7, on such Facility Reset Date Outstandings exceed 80
per cent. of the Qualifying Receivables, in retention of such amount as is
necessary so as to ensure that the Outstandings do not exceed 80 per cent. of
the Qualifying Receivables; and

 

(d)       FOURTHLY:
any surplus shall be paid to the Borrower.

 

13.3    Further repayment provisions. If on any
Facility Reset Date the amount applied in accordance with Clause 13.2:

 

(a)       is
insufficient to repay the Loan in its entirety, the Borrower shall on such
Facility Reset Date repay the whole of the then outstanding balance of the
Loan; and

 

(b)       is
insufficient to ensure that on such Facility Reset Date the Outstandings do not
exceed 80 per cent. of the Qualifying Receivables, the Borrower shall on such
Facility Reset Date pay such amount into the Cash Collateral Account as is
necessary to ensure that the Outstandings do not exceed 80 per cent. of the
Qualifying Receivables.

 

13.4    Payments on Termination Date. On the
Termination Date, the Borrower shall repay the Loan and pay to the Lender all
other sums then accrued or owing under this Agreement.

 

13.5    Voluntary prepayment. Subject to the following
conditions, the Borrower may prepay the whole or part of an Advance.

 

13.6    Conditions for voluntary prepayment. The
conditions referred to in Clause 13.5 are:

 

(a)       that
the Lender has received from the Borrower at least 5 days’ prior written notice
specifying the amount to be prepaid and the date on which the prepayment is to
be made;

 

(b)       that
the amount to be prepaid shall be a minimum of US$5,000,000 (or such other
amount as is agreed by the Lender); and

 

(c)       that
the Borrower has provided evidence satisfactory to the Lender that any official
consent required by the Borrower in connection with the prepayment has been
obtained and remains in force, and that any official requirement relevant to
this Agreement which affects the Borrower has been complied with.

 

13.7    Effect of notice of prepayment. A prepayment
notice may not be withdrawn or amended without the consent of the Lender and
the amount specified in the prepayment notice shall become due and payable by
the Borrower on the date for prepayment specified in the prepayment notice.

 

21

 

13.8    Amounts payable on prepayment. A prepayment
shall be made together with accrued interest (and any other amount payable
under Clause 19 or otherwise) in respect of the amount prepaid and, if the prepayment
is not made on the last day of an Interest Period together with any sums
payable under Clauses 19.1(b) and 19.2 but without premium or penalty.

 

13.9    Reborrowing permitted. Subject to the terms
of this Agreement, any amount repaid or prepaid may be re-borrowed, provided
that following a prepayment under this Clause 13 the Borrower may not submit a
Utilisation Notice before the next following Facility Reset Date.

 

13.10 Withdrawal of surplus from Cash Collateral Account. The
Borrower may at any time during the Facility Period by giving 2 Business Days’
prior written notice to the Lender request that the Lender pay an amount equal
to or more than $100,000 from the Cash Collateral Account to such account as
the Borrower may specify in such notice, and the Lender shall act in accordance
with such request provided that:

 

(a)       the
amount retained in the Cash Collateral Account after such payment shall be
sufficient:

 

(i)        to
enable the Lender to apply any amounts required to be applied on the next
Facility Reset Date in accordance with Clauses 13.2(a) to 13.2(c); and

 

(ii)       to
ensure that, subject to Clause 3.7, at such time the Aggregate Liabilities do
not exceed 80 per cent. of the sum of the Qualifying Receivables and the amount
retained in the Cash Collateral Account; and

 

(b)       no
Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has then occurred and is
continuing.

 

13.11 Cancellation. The Borrower may at any time during
the Facility Period by giving not less than 5 Business Days prior written
notice to the Lender (which shall be irrevocable) cancel the Facility on the
following terms and conditions:

 

(a)       a
cancellation of the Facility pursuant to this Clause 13.11 may only occur if
the Facility is to be refinanced in connection with an initial public offering of
shares in the Borrower’s parent company, Aegean Marine Petroleum Network Inc.;

 

(b)       all
Advances shall be prepaid on the date notified by the Borrower as the date of
cancellation and Clause 13.8 shall apply to such prepayment;

 

(c)       if
the Lender (which, for the avoidance of doubt, shall in this context include
the Piraeus branch of The Royal Bank of Scotland plc) provides the refinancing
facility, arrangements satisfactory to the Lender have been made for all
Letters of Credit outstanding as at the date of cancellation to be made subject
to the terms of the refinancing facility; and

 

(d)       if
the Lender (which, for the avoidance of doubt, shall in this context include
the Piraeus branch of The Royal Bank of Scotland plc) does not provide the
refinancing facility, arrangements satisfactory to the Lender have been made
for all Letters of Credit outstanding as at the date of cancellation to be
fully secured by cash.

 

14       REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

14.1    General. The Borrower represents and warrants
to the Lender as follows.

 

14.2    Status. The Borrower is duly incorporated and
validly existing and in good standing under the laws of Liberia.

 

22

 

14.3    Corporate power. The Borrower has the corporate
capacity, and has taken all corporate action and obtained all official consents
necessary for it:

 

(a)       to
execute this Agreement and the Security Documents;

 

(b)       to
borrow under this Agreement and to make all the payments contemplated by, and
to comply with, this Agreement; and

 

(c)       to
make all payments contemplated by, and to comply with, the Documents.

 

14.4    Official consents in force. All the official
consents referred to in Clause 14.3 remain in force and nothing has occurred
which makes any of them liable to revocation.

 

14.5    Legal validity.

 

(a)       This
Agreement constitutes the Borrower’s legal, valid, binding and enforceable
obligations; and

 

(b)       the
Security Documents create legal, valid and binding Security Interests
enforceable in accordance with their terms over all the assets to which they,
by their terms, relate;

 

in each case, subject to
any relevant insolvency laws affecting creditors’ rights generally.

 

14.6    No third party Security Interests. At the time
of execution and delivery of this Agreement and the Security Documents:

 

(a)       the
Borrower will have the right to create all the Security Interests which the
Security Documents purport to create; and

 

(b)       no
third party will have any Security Interest or any interest, right of claim
over, in or in relation to, any asset to which any such Security Interest, by
its terms, relates.

 

14.7    No conflicts. The execution by the Borrower of
this Agreement and the Security Documents, and the borrowing by the Borrower of
a Utilisation, and its compliance with this Agreement and the Security
Documents will not involve or lead to a contravention of:

 

(a)       any
law or official requirement applicable to it; or

 

(b)       the
constitutional documents of the Borrower; or

 

(c)       any
contractual or other obligation or restriction which is binding on the Borrower
or any of its assets.

 

14.8    No withholding taxes. All payments which the
Borrower is liable to make under this Agreement and the Security Documents may
be made without deduction or withholding for or on account of any tax payable
under any law of any Pertinent Jurisdiction.

 

14.9    No default. No Event of Default or Potential
Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

14.10 Information. All information which has been
provided in writing by or on behalf of the Borrower to the Lender in connection
with this Agreement and the Security Documents satisfied the requirements of
Clause 15.5; all audited and unaudited accounts which have been so provided
satisfied the requirements of Clause 15.7; and there has been no material
adverse change in the financial position or state of affairs of the Borrower
from that disclosed in the latest of those accounts.

 

23

 

14.11 No litigation. No legal or administrative action
involving the Borrower has been commenced or taken or, to the Borrower’s
knowledge, is likely to be commenced or taken which, in either case, would be
likely to have a material adverse effect on the Borrower’s financial position
or profitability.

 

14.12 Compliance with certain undertakings. At the date
of this Agreement, the Borrower is in compliance with the provisions of Clauses
15.2, 15.4 and 15.9 and the provisions of the Security Documents.

 

14.13 Taxes paid. The Borrower has paid all taxes
applicable to, or imposed on, or in relation to, the Borrower or its business.

 

14.14 Repetition. The representations and warranties of
the Borrower set out in Clauses 14.2 to 14.14 shall survive the execution of
this Agreement and the Security Documents and the making of each Utilisation
and shall, subject to Clause 14.15, be deemed to be repeated at the beginning
of each Interest Period, with reference to the facts and circumstances existing
at each such time, as if made at each such time.

 

14.15 Qualification to repetition. The repeating
provisions of Clause 14.14 shall not apply to the representations and
warranties contained in Clauses 14.8 and 14.11.

 

15       UNDERTAKINGS

 

15.1    General. The Borrower undertakes with the
Lender to comply with the following provisions of this Clause 15 at all times
during the Facility Period, except as the Lender may otherwise permit.

 

15.2    Negative pledge. The Borrower shall not create
or permit to arise any Security Interest over any Qualifying Receivables,
except as provided by any Security Document.

 

15.3    No disposal of assets. The Borrower shall not
(except in the ordinary course of business or operations, in which case the
Borrower shall give 60 days’ prior written notice to the Lender of the same)
either in a single transaction or in a series of transactions, whether related
or not and whether voluntarily or involuntarily, sell, transfer, grant a lease
or otherwise dispose of to any person:

 

(a)       all
or more than 15 per cent (in value) of its assets; or

 

(b)       any
debt payable to it or any right (present, future or contingent right) to
receive a payment, including any right to damages or compensation.

 

15.4    No change of business. The Borrower shall not
engage in any business or activities other than the business and activities
carried on by it at the date of this Agreement.

 

15.5    Information provided to be accurate. All
financial and other information which is provided in writing by or on behalf of
the Borrower under, or in connection with, this Agreement and the Security
Documents shall be true and not misleading and shall not omit any material fact
or consideration.

 

15.6    Provision of financial statements. The Borrower
shall send to the Lender:

 

(a)       as
soon as possible, but in no event later than 4 months after the end of each
financial year of the Borrower, the audited accounts of the Borrower;

 

(b)       as
soon as possible, but in no event later than 4 months after the end of each
financial year of the ultimate parent company of the Borrower, the audited
consolidated accounts of such ultimate parent company of the Borrower and its
subsidiaries (if such accounts are in fact drawn up);

 

24

 

(c)       as
soon as possible, but in no event later than 2 months after the end of each
half-year in each financial year of the Borrower, the unaudited accounts of the
Borrower which are certified as to their correctness by the chief financial
officer of the Borrower;

 

(d)       as
soon as possible, but in no event later than 1 month after they are produced,
any management accounts of the Borrower.

 

15.7    Form of financial statements. All accounts
(audited and unaudited) delivered under Clause 15.6 shall:

 

(a)       be
prepared in accordance with all applicable laws and generally accepted
accounting principles consistently applied;

 

(b)       give
a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Borrower or ultimate parent
company of the Borrower and its subsidiaries, as relevant, at the date of those
accounts and of its profit for the period to which those accounts relate; and

 

(c)       fully
disclose or provide for all significant liabilities of the Borrower or ultimate
parent company of the Borrower and its subsidiaries, as relevant.

 

15.8    Shareholder and creditor notices. The Borrower
shall send the Lender, at the same time as they are despatched, copies of all
communications which are despatched to the Borrower’s shareholders or creditors
or any class of them.

 

15.9    Official consents. The Borrower shall maintain
in force and promptly obtain or renew, and shall promptly send certified copies
to the Lender of, all official consents required:

 

(a)       for
the Borrower to perform its obligations and liabilities under this Agreement
and the Security Documents; and

 

(b)       for
the validity or enforceability of this Agreement and the Security Documents;

 

and the Borrower shall
comply with the terms of all such official consents.

 

15.10 Maintenance of obligations. The Borrower shall:

 

(a)       at
its own cost, do all that it reasonably can to ensure that each of this
Agreement and the Security Documents validly creates the liabilities, obligations
and, as appropriate, the Security Interests which it purports to create; and

 

(b)       without
limiting the generality of paragraph (a) above, at its own cost, promptly
register, file, record or enrol this Agreement and the Security Documents with
any court or authority in all relevant jurisdictions, pay any stamp,
registration or similar tax in all relevant jurisdictions in respect of this
Agreement and the Security Documents, give any notice or take any other step
which may be or become necessary or desirable for this Agreement and the
Security Documents to be valid, enforceable or admissible in evidence or to
ensure or protect the priority of any Security Interest which it creates; and

 

(c)       ensure
that its liabilities under this Agreement are secured by, and in accordance
with, the Security Documents subject to any relevant insolvency laws affecting
creditors’ rights generally.

 

15.11 Notification of litigation. The Borrower shall
provide the Lender with details of any legal or administrative action involving
the Borrower as soon as such action is instituted or it becomes apparent to the
Borrower that it is likely to be instituted, unless it is clear that the legal
or administrative action cannot be considered material in the context of this
Agreement and the Security Documents.

 

25

 

15.12 Confirmation of no default. The Borrower shall, within 2 Business Days
after service by the Lender of a written request, serve on the Lender a notice
which is signed by 2 directors of the Borrower and which:

 

(a)       states
that no Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred; or

 

(b)       states
that no Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred, except for
a specified event or matter, of which all material details are given.

 

15.13 Notification of default. The Borrower shall notify
the Lender as soon as the Borrower becomes aware of:

 

(a)       the
occurrence of an Event of Default or a Potential Event of Default; or

 

(b)       any
matter which indicates that an Event of Default or a Potential Event of Default
may have occurred;

 

and shall thereafter keep
the Lender fully up-to-date with all developments.

 

15.14 Exposure Test. Without
prejudice to the provisions of Clause 3, the Lender may require the Borrower at
reasonable intervals specified by the Lender from time to time (not being more
frequently than once per week) to ensure that the test contained in Clause
3.4(d) would, if then applied, not be breached by:

 

(a)       providing
further Receivables which are Qualifying Receivables; and/or

 

(b)       placing
further funds to the credit of the Cash Collateral Account.

 

The Borrower shall
promptly and, in any event within five (5) days of written notice to that
effect from the Lender, ensure that the test contained in Clause 3.4(d) would,
if then applied, not be breached by providing further Receivables or placing
further funds as aforesaid. For the purposes of this Clause 15.14, the
reference in Clause 3.4(d)(ii)(A) to “the latest schedule of Receivables
submitted to the Lender pursuant to Clause 6.1(c)” shall be deemed to refer to
the latest schedule of Receivables delivered pursuant to this Clause 15.14. The
Borrower shall provide the Lender with such information, including without
limitation, schedules of Receivables, as the Lender shall from time to time
require for the purpose of giving effect to this Clause 15.14.

 

15.15 Provision of further information. The Borrower shall, as soon as practicable
after receiving the request, provide the Lender with any additional financial
or other information relating to the Borrower, its businesses or to any other
matter relevant to, or to any provision of, this Agreement or the Security
Documents which may be requested by the Lender at any time.

 

16       PAYMENTS AND CALCULATIONS

 

16.1    Borrower’s Accounts.

 

(a)       Unless
provided otherwise in this Agreement, the Borrower will throughout the Facility
Period continue to maintain the Current Account and the Cash Collateral Account
in its name at the branch of the Lender at 45 Akti Miaouli, 185 10 Piraeus,
Greece.

 

(b)       None
of the provisions contained in this Agreement relating to the application of
funds in the Current Account and the Cash Collateral Account shall affect the
obligations of the Borrower to make any payment required to be made to the
Lender on the due date for application thereof in accordance with this
Agreement and any Security Documents.

 

26

 

(c)       No
change shall be made to the designation or location of the Current Account or
the Cash Collateral Account except with the prior written consent of the Lender
and subject to the Lender being satisfied that the security over the Current
Account and the Cash Collateral Account constituted by the Additional Account
Security Document and the Account Security Document remains in full force and
effect.

 

16.2    Payments of Receivables. The Borrower shall
procure that each Customer pays all Receivables due from it which are the
subject of a Schedule of Receivables to the Current Account or the Cash Collateral
Account when due.

 

16.3    Transfer of Receivables to Cash Collateral Account.
Promptly upon any Receivables having been paid into the Current Account the
Borrower shall transfer an amount equal to such Receivables from the Current
Account to the Cash Collateral Account.

 

16.4    Cash Collateral Account. The Borrower may only
withdraw amounts standing to the credit of the Cash Collateral Account as set
out in Clause 13.

 

16.5    Other payments. All payments to be made by the
Borrower to the Lender under this Agreement and the Security Documents shall be
made to the Lender:

 

(a)       if
in Dollars:

 

(i)        by
not later than 11.00 a.m. (New York time) on the due date;

 

(ii)       in
same day Dollar funds settled through the New York Clearing House Interbank
Payments System (or in such other Dollar funds and/or settled in such other
manner as the Lender shall specify as being customary at the time for the
settlement of international transactions of the type contemplated by this
Agreement); and

 

(iii)      to
the account of the Lender at American Express Bank Limited, 23rd Floor,
American Express Tower, 200 Vesey Street, New York, NY 10285-2300, U.S.A.
(Account No 000261123), or to such other account with such other bank as the
Lender may from time to time notify to the Borrower;

 

(b)       if
in an Optional Currency (other than Euros and Sterling):

 

(i)        by
not later than 11.00 a.m. local time in the place for payment (or such other
time as may be required law or practice for the settlement of foreign exchange
transactions in the place of payment) on the due date; and

 

(ii)       in
lawful money of the country of that currency which is freely transferable and
convertible into Dollars and in immediately available funds to the account of
such bank in such place in the country of that currency as the Lender shall
from time to time notify to the Borrower;

 

(c)       if
in Sterling:

 

(i)        by
not later than 11.00 a.m. (London time) on the due date;

 

(ii)       in
immediately available funds; and

 

(iii)      to
such account of the Lender with such bank as the Lender shall from time to time
notify to the Borrower; and

 

(d)       if
in Euros:

 

(i)        by
not later than 11.00 a.m. (Greek time) on the due date;

 

27

 

(ii)       in
immediately available funds; and

 

(iii)      to
such account of the Agent or, as the case may be, the relevant Lender with such
bank as the Agent or, as the case may be, the relevant Lender may from time to
time notify to the Borrower.

 

16.6    Payment on non-Business Day. If any payment by
the Borrower under this Agreement or a Security Document would otherwise fall
due on a day which is not a Business Day:

 

(a)       the
due date shall be extended to the next succeeding Business Day; or

 

(b)       if
the next succeeding Business Day falls in the next calendar month, the due date
shall be brought forward to the immediately preceding Business Day;

 

and interest shall be
payable during any extension under paragraph (a) at the rate payable on the
original due date.

 

16.7    Basis for calculation of periodic payments. All
interest and commitment fee and any other payments under this Agreement which
are of an annual or periodic nature shall accrue from day to day and shall be
calculated on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and:

 

(a)       in
the case of payments denominated in Dollars or an Optional Currency other than
Sterling or Hong Kong Dollars, on the basis of a 360 day year; and

 

(b)       in
the case of payments denominated in Sterling or Hong Kong Dollars, on the basis
of a 365 day year.

 

16.8    Lender accounts. The Lender shall maintain an
account showing the amounts advanced by the Lender and all other sums owing to
the Lender from the Borrower under this Agreement and the Security Documents
and all payments in respect of those amounts made by the Borrower.

 

16.9    Accounts prima facie evidence. If the account
maintained under Clause 16.8 shows an amount to be owing by the Borrower to the
Lender, that account shall be prima facie evidence that amount is owing to the
Lender.

 

16.10 Types of L/C. For all purposes of this Agreement
the Lender shall determine, which determination shall be conclusive, whether an
L/C is to be classified as a Documentary L/C, a Transaction Related Standby L/C
or a Direct Credit Substitute.

 

17       EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

17.1    Events of Default. An Event of Default occurs
if:

 

(a)       the
Borrower or the Guarantor fails to pay when due or (if so payable) on demand
any sum payable under this Agreement or the Security Documents or under any
document relating to this Agreement or the Security Documents; or

 

(b)       any
breach occurs of Clause 6.2, 15.2, 15.3 or 15.4; or

 

(c)       any
breach by the Borrower or the Guarantor occurs of any provision of this
Agreement or the Security Documents (other than a breach covered by paragraph
(a) or (b) above) unless, in the opinion of the Lender, such default is capable
of remedy and such default is remedied to the satisfaction of the Lender within
10 days after written notice from the Lender requesting action to remedy the
same; or

 

28

 

(d)                    (subject to
any applicable grace period specified in this Agreement or the Security
Documents) any breach by the Borrower or the Guarantor occurs of any provision
of this Agreement or the Security Documents (other than a breach covered by
paragraph (a), (b) or (c) above); or

 

(e)                     any
representation, warranty or statement made by, or by an officer of, the
Borrower or the Guarantor in this Agreement or the Security Documents or in a
Utilisation Notice or any other notice or document relating to this Agreement
or the Security Documents is untrue or misleading when it is made or deemed to
be repeated; or

 

(f)                       any of the
following occurs in relation to any Financial Indebtedness of the Borrower or
the Guarantor:

 

(i)                       any
Financial Indebtedness of the Borrower or the Guarantor is not paid when due
or, if so payable, on demand; or

 

(ii)                    any Financial
Indebtedness of the Borrower or the Guarantor becomes due and payable or
capable of being declared due and payable prior to its stated maturity date as
a consequence of any event of default; or

 

(iii)                 a lease or hire
purchase agreement creating any Financial Indebtedness of the Borrower or the
Guarantor is terminated by the lessor or owner or becomes capable of being
terminated as a consequence of any termination event; or

 

(iv)                any overdraft,
loan, note issuance, acceptance credit, letter of credit, guarantee, foreign
exchange or other facility, or any swap or other derivative contract or
transaction, relating to any Financial Indebtedness of the Borrower or the Guarantor
ceases to be available or becomes capable of being terminated as a result of
any event of default, or cash cover is required, or becomes capable of being
required, in respect of such a facility as a result of any event of default; or

 

(v)                   any Security
Interest securing any Financial Indebtedness of the Borrower or the Guarantor
becomes enforceable; or

 

(g)                    any of the
following occurs:

 

(i)                       the
Borrower or the Guarantor becomes, in the opinion of the Lender, unable to pay
its debts as they fall due; or

 

(ii)                    any assets of
the Borrower or the Guarantor are subject to any form of execution, attachment,
arrest, sequestration, distress or any form of freezing order in respect of a
sum of, or sums aggregating, $250,000 or more or the equivalent in another currency;
or

 

(iii)                 any
administrative receiver or other receiver is appointed over any asset of the
Borrower; or

 

(iv)                any step is taken
in relation to the appointment of an administrative receiver of the Borrower;
or

 

(v)                   an
administrator is appointed (whether by the court or otherwise) in respect of
the Borrower; or

 

(vi)                a resolution is
passed, an application to a court is made or any other step is taken by a
creditor of the Borrower (other than the holder of Security Interests which
together relate to all or substantially all of the assets of the Borrower) for
the appointment of an administrator in respect of the Borrower, unless:

 

29

 

(A)                 the proposed
administration is being contested in good faith, on substantial grounds and not
with a view to some other insolvency law procedure being implemented instead;

 

(B)                   the application
is dismissed or withdrawn within 30 days of being made; and

 

(C)                   the Borrower
will continue to carry on business in the ordinary way and without being the
subject of any actual, interim or pending insolvency law procedure; or

 

(vii)             an Administration
Notice is given or filed, a resolution is passed, an application to a court is
made or any other step is taken by:

 

(A)                 the members of
the Borrower,

 

(B)                   the directors
of the Borrower, or

 

(C)                   a creditor that
is a holder of Security Interests which together relate to all or substantially
all of the assets of the Borrower,

 

for or with a view to the
appointment of an administrator in respect of the Borrower; or

 

(viii)          a resolution is passed,
an application to a court is made or any other step is taken by a government
minister or public or regulatory authority of a Pertinent Jurisdiction for or
with a view to the appointment of an administrator in respect of the Borrower;
or

 

(ix)                  a petition is
presented to a court, a resolution is passed, or any other step is taken for or
with a view to the appointment of a provisional liquidator in respect of the
Borrower unless:

 

(A)                 the proposed
appointment is being contested in good faith, on substantial grounds and not
with a view to some other insolvency law procedure being implemented instead;

 

(B)                   the petition is
dismissed or withdrawn within 30 days of being presented; and

 

(C)                   the Borrower
will continue to carry on business in the ordinary way and without being the
subject of any actual, interim or pending insolvency law procedure; or

 

(x)                     a petition is
presented to a court, a resolution is passed or any other step is taken for or
with a view to the winding up of the Borrower, save that this paragraph does
not apply to a fully solvent winding up of the Borrower which is, or is to be,
effected for the purposes of an amalgamation or reconstruction previously
approved by the Lender and effected not later than 3 months after the
commencement of the winding up; or

 

(xi)                  the Guarantor
or, in any proceedings, a lawyer acting for the Guarantor makes any formal
declaration of bankruptcy or any formal statement to the effect that the
Guarantor is insolvent or likely to become insolvent; or

 

(xii)               any meeting of the
members or directors, or of any committee of the board or senior management, of
the Borrower is held or summoned for the purpose of considering a resolution or
proposal to authorise or take any action of a type

 

30

 

described in paragraphs
(v) to (xi) above or a step preparatory to such action, or (with or without
such a meeting) the members, directors or such a committee resolve or agree
that that such an action or step should be taken or should be taken if certain
conditions materialise or fail to materialise; or

 

(xiii)            in any country other
than England, any event occurs or any proceedings are opened or commenced or
any step is taken which, in the opinion of the Lender, is similar to any of the
foregoing; or

 

(h)                    the Guarantor,
the Borrower or the Borrower’s directors petition or apply to a court for, or
the Guarantor, the Borrower or the Borrower’s directors take any steps to
obtain or submit or present a document setting out the proposed terms of, or
any other proposal for, any form of moratorium, suspension or deferral of
payments, reorganisation of the Guarantor’s or the Borrower’s debt (or certain
of the Guarantor’s or the Borrower’s debt) or arrangement with, or protection
from, all or a substantial proportion (by number or value) of the Guarantor’s
or the Borrower’s creditors or of any class of them or any such moratorium,
suspension or deferral of payments, reorganisation, arrangement or protection
is effected by court order, by the filing of documents with a court, by means
of a contract or in any other way at all; or

 

(i)                        the
Borrower ceases or suspends carrying on its business or a part of its business
which, in the opinion of the Lender, is material in the context of this
Agreement or the Security Documents; or

 

(j)                        it becomes
unlawful in any Pertinent Jurisdiction or impossible:

 

(i)                       for the
Borrower or the Guarantor to discharge any liability under this Agreement or to
comply with any other obligation which the Lender considers material under this
Agreement or the Security Documents; or

 

(ii)                    for the Lender
to exercise or enforce any right under this Agreement or the Security
Documents; or

 

(k)                     any official
consent necessary to enable the Borrower to comply with any provision which the
Lender considers material of this Agreement or the Security Documents is not
granted, expires without being renewed, is revoked or becomes liable to
revocation or any condition of such a consent is not fulfilled; or

 

(l)                        without
the prior written consent of the Lender there is a change in the legal and
beneficial ownership, or in the ultimate beneficial ownership, of the shares in
the Borrower from that existing at the date of this Agreement and disclosed to
the Lender; or

 

(m)                  any provision
which the Lender considers material of this Agreement or the Security Documents
proves to have been or becomes invalid or unenforceable; or

 

(n)                    any other
event occurs or any other circumstances arise or develop including, without
limitation a change in the financial position, state of affairs or prospects of
the Borrower or the Guarantor, in the light of which the Lender considers that
there is a significant risk that the Borrower or the Guarantor is, or will
later become, unable to discharge its liabilities and obligations under this
Agreement or the Security Documents, as appropriate, as they fall due.

 

17.2           Actions following an
Event of Default. On, or at any time after, the occurrence of an Event of
Default, the Lender may:

 

(a)                     serve on the
Borrower a notice stating that the Commitment and all liabilities and
obligations of the Lender to the Borrower under this Agreement are terminated;
and/or

 

31

 

(b)                    serve on the
Borrower a notice stating that the Loan, all accrued interest and all other
amounts accrued or owing under this Agreement and the Security Documents are
immediately due and payable or are due and payable on demand; and/or

 

(c)                     make demand
for payment of cash collateral by the Borrower in accordance with Clause 12.6;
and/or

 

(d)                    take any other
action which, as a result of the Event of Default or any notice served under
paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) above, the Lender is entitled to take under this
Agreement, the Security Documents or any applicable law.

 

17.3           Termination of
obligations. On the service of a notice under paragraph (a) of Clause 17.2,
the Commitment and all the liabilities and obligations of the Lender to the
Borrower under this Agreement shall terminate.

 

17.4           Acceleration of Loan. On
the service of a notice under paragraph (b) of Clause 17.2, the Loan, all
accrued interest and all other amounts accrued or owing from the Borrower under
this Agreement and the Security Documents shall become immediately due and payable
or, as the case may be, payable on demand.

 

17.5           Multiple notices;
action without notice. The Lender may serve notices under paragraphs (a),
(b) and (c) of Clause 17.2 simultaneously or on different dates and it may take
any action referred to in that Clause if no such notice is served or
simultaneously with, or at any time after, the service of both or either of
such notices.

 

17.6           Exclusion of Lender
liability. Neither the Lender nor any receiver or manager appointed by the
Lender, shall have any liability to the Borrower or the Guarantor for any loss
caused by an exercise of rights under this Agreement or the Security Documents
or by any failure or delay to exercise such a right except that this does not
exempt the Lender or a receiver or manager from liability for losses shown to
have been directly and mainly caused by the dishonesty or the wilful misconduct
of the Lender’s own officers and employees or (as the case may be) such
receiver’s or manager’s own partners or employees.

 

17.7           Interpretation. In
Clause 17.1(f), references to an event of default or a termination event
include any event, howsoever described, which is similar to an event of default
in a facility agreement or a termination event in a finance lease; and, in
Clause 17.1(g), “petition” includes
an application.

 

18                     FEES AND
EXPENSES

 

18.1           Fees. The Borrower
shall pay to the Lender:

 

(a)                     on the
earlier of the first Utilisation Date and the date falling 10 Business Days
after 24 September 2004, an arrangement fee of $100,000;

 

(b)                    on the date of
the Second Amendment Agreement or, if later, before the Effective Date (as
defined in the Second Amendment Agreement) an arrangement fee of $50,000;

 

(c)                     on or before
2 October 2006, a renewal fee of $18,750;

 

(d)                    monthly in
arrears during the Availability Period and on the last day thereof a commitment
fee at the rate of 0.25 per cent. per annum on the amount of the Available
Commitment;

 

(e)                     monthly in
arrears on the date falling one month after the date of this Agreement and at
monthly intervals thereafter letter of credit commission on the Outstanding LC
Amount of each L/C outstanding during any part of the relevant monthly period,
calculated in

 

32

 

respect of each L/C from
its Utilisation Date until its Expiry Date at the following respective rates in
respect of each type of L/C:

 

(i)                       Documentary
L/Cs: 0.25 per cent. per annum;

 

(ii)                    Transaction
Related Standby L/Cs: 0.625 per cent. per annum;

 

(iii)                 Direct Credit
Substitutes: 1.125 per cent. per annum;

 

(f)                       on each
Renewal Date which is not a Termination Date, a renewal fee at the rate of
0.125 per cent. per annum on the amount of the Facility as renewed; and

 

(g)                    on each
Utilisation Date on which the Lender issues an L/C pursuant to a Utilisation
Notice, a processing fee of $500 in respect of each L/C so issued.

 

18.2           Costs of negotiation,
preparation etc. The Borrower shall pay to the Lender on its demand the
amount of all expenses incurred by the Lender in connection with the
negotiation, preparation, execution or registration of this Agreement, the
Security Documents or any related document or with any transaction or matter
relating to a transaction contemplated by this Agreement, the Security
Documents or a related document.

 

18.3           Costs of variation,
amendments, enforcement etc. The Borrower shall pay to the Lender, on the
Lender’s demand, the amount of all expenses incurred by the Lender in
connection with:

 

(a)                     any amendment
or supplement to this Agreement, the Security Documents, or any proposal for
such an amendment to be made;

 

(b)                    any consent or
waiver by the Lender under or in connection with this Agreement, the Security
Documents, or any request for such a consent or waiver; and

 

(c)                     any step
taken by the Lender with a view to the protection, exercise or enforcement of
any right created by this Agreement, the Security Documents or for any similar
purpose.

 

There shall be
recoverable under paragraph (c) the full amount of all legal expenses, whether
or not such as would be allowed under rules of court or any taxation or other
procedure carried out under such rules.

 

18.4           Documentary taxes. The
Borrower shall promptly pay any tax payable on or by reference to this
Agreement or the Security Documents, and shall, on the Lender’s demand, fully
indemnify the Lender against any liabilities and expenses resulting from any
failure or delay by the Borrower to pay such a tax.

 

18.5           Certification of
amounts. A notice which is signed by 2 officers of the Lender, which states
that a specified amount, or aggregate amount, is due to the Lender under this
Clause 18 and which indicates (without necessarily specifying a detailed
breakdown) the matters in respect of which the amount, or aggregate amount, is
due shall be prima facie evidence that the amount, or aggregate amount, is due.

 

19                     INDEMNITIES

 

19.1           Indemnities regarding
Utilisations and payment of Aggregate Liabilities. The Borrower shall fully
indemnify the Lender on its demand in respect of all claims and losses which
are made or brought against or incurred by the Lender, or which the Lender
reasonably and with due diligence estimates that it will incur, as a result of
or in connection with:

 

33

 

(a)                     an Advance
not being borrowed or an L/C not being issued on the date specified in the
Utilisation Notice for any reason other than a default by the Lender;

 

(b)                    the receipt or
recovery of all or any part of a Utilisation or an overdue sum otherwise than
on the last day of an Interest Period or other relevant period;

 

(c)                     any failure
(for whatever reason) by the Borrower to make payment of any amount due under
this Agreement or the Security Documents on the due date or, if so payable, on
demand (after giving credit for any default interest paid by the Borrower on
the amount concerned under Clause 9);

 

(d)                    the occurrence
and/or continuance of an Event of Default or a Potential Event of Default
and/or the acceleration of repayment of the Loan under Clause 17;

 

and in respect of any tax
(other than tax on its overall net income) for which the Lender is liable in
connection with any amount paid or payable to the Lender (whether for its own
account or otherwise) under this Agreement or the Security Documents.

 

19.2           Breakage costs. Without
limiting its generality, Clause 19.1 covers any claim or loss, including a loss
of a prospective profit, incurred by the Lender:

 

(a)                     in
liquidating or employing deposits from third parties acquired or arranged to
fund or maintain all or any part of the Loan and/or any overdue amount (or an
aggregate amount which includes the Loan or any overdue amount); and

 

(b)                    in
terminating, or otherwise in connection with, any interest and/or currency swap
or any other transaction entered into (whether with another legal entity or
with another office or department of the Lender) to hedge any exposure arising
under this Agreement or a number of transactions of which this Agreement is
one.

 

19.3           Miscellaneous
indemnities. The Borrower shall fully indemnify the Lender on its demand in
respect of all claims and losses which may be made or brought against, or
incurred by, the Lender, in any country, in relation to:

 

(a)                     any action
taken, or omitted or neglected to be taken, under, or in connection with, this
Agreement or the Security Documents by the Lender;

 

(b)                    any other
event, matter or question which occurs or arises at any time during the
Facility Period and which has any connection with, or any bearing on, this
Agreement or the Security Documents, any payment or other transaction relating
to this Agreement or the Security Documents;

 

other than claims and
losses which are shown to have been directly and mainly caused by the gross
negligence or the wilful misconduct of the Lender’s own officers or employees.

 

19.4           Currency indemnity. If
any sum due from the Borrower to the Lender under this Agreement or the
Security Documents or under any order or judgment relating to this Agreement or
the Security Documents has to be converted from the currency in which this
Agreement or the Security Documents provided for the sum to be paid (the “Contractual Currency”) into another currency (the “Payment Currency”) for the purpose of:

 

(a)                     making or
lodging any claim or proof against the Borrower whether in its liquidation, any
arrangement involving it or otherwise; or

 

(b)                    obtaining an
order or judgment from any court or other tribunal; or

 

(c)                     enforcing any
such order or judgment,

 

34

 

the Borrower shall
indemnify the Lender against the loss arising when the amount of the Payment
Currency actually received by the Lender is converted at the available rate of
exchange into the Contractual Currency.

 

In this Clause 19.4, the
“available rate of exchange” means the rate at which the Lender is able at the
opening of business (Piraeus time) on the Business Day after it receives the
sum concerned to purchase the Contractual Currency with the Payment Currency.

 

This Clause 19.4 creates
a separate liability of the Borrower which is distinct from its other
liabilities under this Agreement or the Security Documents and which shall not
be merged in any judgment or order relating to those other liabilities.

 

19.5           Certification of
amounts. A notice which is signed by 2 officers of the Lender, which states
that a specified amount, or aggregate amount, is due to the Lender under this
Clause 19 and which indicates (without necessarily specifying a detailed
breakdown) the matters in respect of which the amount, or aggregate amount, is
due shall be prima facie evidence that the amount, or aggregate amount, is due.

 

20                     NO SET-OFF OR
TAX DEDUCTION

 

20.1           No deductions. All
amounts due from the Borrower under this Agreement and the Security Documents
shall be paid:

 

(a)                     without any
form of set-off, cross-claim or condition; and

 

(b)                    free and clear
of any tax deduction except a tax deduction which the Borrower is required by
law to make.

 

20.2           Grossing-up for taxes. If
the Borrower is required by law to make a tax deduction from any payment:

 

(a)                     the Borrower
shall notify the Lender as soon as it becomes aware of the requirement;

 

(b)                    the Borrower
shall pay the tax deducted to the appropriate taxation authority promptly, and
in any event before any fine or penalty arises; and

 

(c)                     the amount
due in respect of the payment shall be increased by the amount necessary to
ensure that the Lender receives and retains (free from any liability relating
to the tax deduction) an amount which, after the tax deduction, is equal to the
full amount which it would otherwise have received.

 

20.3           Evidence of payment of
taxes. Within one month after making any tax deduction, the Borrower shall
deliver to the Lender documentary evidence satisfactory to the Lender that the
tax had been paid to the appropriate taxation authority.

 

20.4           Exclusion of tax on
overall net income. In this Clause 20, “tax
deduction” means any deduction or withholding for or on account of
any present or future tax except tax on the Lender’s overall net income.

 

21                     ILLEGALITY,
ETC

 

21.1           Illegality. This Clause 21 applies if the
Lender notifies the Borrower that it has become, or will with effect from a
specified date, become:

 

(a)                     unlawful or
prohibited as a result of the introduction of a new law, an amendment to an
existing law or a change in the manner in which an existing law is or will be
interpreted or applied; or

 

35

 

(b)                    contrary to,
or inconsistent with, an official requirement,

 

for the Lender to
maintain or give effect to any of its liabilities and obligations under this
Agreement in the manner contemplated by this Agreement.

 

21.2           Notification and effect
of illegality. On the Lender notifying the Borrower under Clause 21.1, the
Lender’s obligation to make any further Utilisations shall terminate; and
thereupon or, if later, on the date specified in the Lender’s notice under
Clause 21.1 as the date on which the notified event would become effective the
Borrower shall prepay the Loan in full in accordance with Clause 13.

 

22                     INCREASED
COSTS

 

22.1           Increased costs.

 

(a)                     Subject to
Clause 22.3 the Borrower shall, within three Business Days of a demand by the
Lender, pay for the account of the Lender the amount of any Increased Costs
incurred by the Lender or any of its Affiliates as a result of (i) the
introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or
application of) any law or regulation or (ii) compliance with any law or
regulation made after the date of this Agreement.

 

(b)                    In this
Agreement:

 

“Increased
Costs” means:

 

(i)                       a reduction
in the rate of return from the Facility or on the Lender’s (or its Affiliate’s)
overall capital;

 

(ii)                    an additional
or increased cost; or

 

(iii)                 a reduction of
any amount due and payable under this Agreement,

 

which is incurred or
suffered by the Lender or any of its Affiliates to the extent that it is
attributable to the Lender having entered into the Commitment or funding or
performing its obligations under this Agreement;

 

“Affiliate”
means, in relation to any person, a subsidiary of that person
or a holding company of that person or any other subsidiary of that holding
company.

 

22.2           Increased costs claims.

 

(a)                     If the Lender
intends to make a claim pursuant to Clause 22.1 it shall notify the Borrower of
the event giving rise to the claim.

 

(b)                    The Lender
shall, as soon as practicable after a notification under Clause 22.2(a),
provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Increased Costs.

 

22.3           Exceptions. Clause
22.1 does not apply to the extent any Increased Cost is:

 

(a)                     compensated
for by the indemnity for tax in Clause 19.1; or

 

(b)                    compensated
for by the grossing-up provisions in Clause 20.2; or

 

(c)                     compensated
for by the payment of the Mandatory Cost Rate; or

 

(d)                    attributable
to the wilful breach by the Lender or its Affiliates of any law or regulation.

 

22.4           Notice of prepayment. If
the Borrower is not willing to continue to compensate the Lender for the
increased cost under Clause 22.1, the Borrower may give the Lender not

 

36

 

less than 14 days’ notice
of its intention to prepay a Utilisation at the end of an Interest Period.

 

22.5           Prepayment. Notice
under Clause 22.4 shall be irrevocable; and on the date specified in its notice
of intended prepayment, the Borrower shall prepay (without premium or penalty)
a Utilisation, together with accrued interest thereon at the applicable rate
plus the Mandatory Cost Rate and the Margin.

 

22.6           Provisions for
prepayment. Clauses 13.6(c), 13.7 and 13.9 shall apply in relation to the
prepayment.

 

23                     SET-OFF

 

23.1           Application of credit
balances. The Lender may without prior notice:

 

(a)                     apply any
balance (whether or not then due) which at any time stands to the credit of any
account in the name of the Borrower at any office of the Lender in any country
in or towards satisfaction of any sum then due from the Borrower to the Lender
under this Agreement or the Security Documents; and

 

(b)                    for that
purpose:

 

(i)                       break, or
alter the maturity of, all or any part of a deposit of the Borrower;

 

(ii)                    convert or
translate all or any part of a deposit or other credit balance into Dollars;

 

(iii)                 enter into any
other transaction or make any entry with regard to the credit balance which the
Lender considers appropriate.

 

23.2           Existing rights
unaffected. The Lender shall not be obliged to exercise any of its rights
under Clause 23.1; and those rights shall be without prejudice and in addition
to any right of set-off, combination of accounts, charge, lien or other right
or remedy to which the Lender is entitled (whether under the general law or any
document).

 

23.3           No Security Interest. This
Clause 23 gives the Lender a contractual right of set-off only, and does not
create an equitable charge or other Security Interest over any credit balance
of the Borrower.

 

24                     TRANSFERS AND
CHANGES IN FACILITY OFFICES

 

24.1           Transfer by Borrower. The
Borrower may not, without the consent of the Lender:

 

(a)                     transfer any
of its rights, liabilities or obligations under this Agreement or the Security
Documents; or

 

(b)                    enter into any
merger, de-merger or other reorganisation, or carry out any other act, as a
result of which any of its rights, liabilities or obligations would vest in, or
pass to, another person.

 

24.2           Assignment by Lender. The
Lender may assign all or any of the rights and interests which it has under, or
by virtue of, this Agreement or the Security Documents without the consent of
the Borrower.

 

24.3           Rights of assignee. In
respect of any breach of a warranty, undertaking, condition or other provision
of this Agreement or the Security Documents, or any misrepresentation made in,
or in connection with, this Agreement or the Security Documents, a direct or
indirect assignee of any of the Lender’s rights or interests under, or by
virtue of, this

 

37

 

Agreement or the Security
Documents shall be entitled to recover damages by reference to the loss
incurred by that assignee as a result of the breach or misrepresentation
irrespective of whether the Lender would have incurred a loss of that kind or
amount.

 

24.4           Sub-participation; subrogation
assignment. The Lender may sub-participate all or any part of its rights
and/or obligations and/or liabilities under, or in connection with, this
Agreement or the Security Documents without the consent of, or any notice to,
the Borrower; and the Lender may assign, in any manner and terms agreed by it,
all or any part of those rights to an insurer or surety who has become
subrogated to them.

 

24.5           Disclosure of
information. The Lender may disclose to an actual or potential assignee or
sub-participant or any other person to whom, and to the extent that,
information is required to be disclosed by any applicable law or regulation any
information which the Lender has received in relation to the Borrower or its
affairs under or in connection with this Agreement or the Security Documents
provided that, in respect of any such information which is clearly of a
confidential nature, any such assignee or sub-participant has entered into a
confidentiality undertaking in favour of the Borrower in form and substance
satisfactory to the Borrower, acting reasonably. The Lender may also disclose
the size and term of the Facility and the nature of the Borrower and the
Guarantor to any investor or potential investor in a securitisation (or similar
transaction of broadly equivalent economic effect) of the Lender’s rights or
obligations in respect of the Facility.

 

24.6           Change of facility
office. The Lender may change its facility office by giving notice to the
Borrower and the change shall become effective on the later of:

 

(a)                     the date on
which the Borrower receives the notice; and

 

(b)                    the date, if
any, specified in the notice as the date on which the change will come into
effect.

 

25                     VARIATIONS
AND WAIVERS

 

25.1           Variations, waivers
etc. by Lender. A document shall be effective to vary, waive, suspend or
limit any provision of this Agreement or the Security Documents or the Lender’s
rights or remedies under such a provision or the general law, only if the
document is signed or specifically agreed to by fax or telex by the Borrower
and the Lender.

 

25.2           Exclusion of other or
implied variations. Except for a document which satisfies the requirements
of Clauses 25.1, no document, and no act, course of conduct, failure or neglect
to act, delay or acquiescence on the part of the Lender (or any person acting
on its behalf) shall result in the Lender (or any person acting on its behalf)
being taken to have varied, waived, suspended or limited, or being precluded
(permanently or temporarily) from enforcing, relying on or exercising:

 

(a)                     a provision
of this Agreement or the Security Documents; or

 

(b)                    an Event of
Default; or

 

(c)                     a breach by
the Borrower of an obligation or liability under this Agreement or the Security
Documents or the general law; or

 

(d)                    any right or
remedy conferred by this Agreement or by the general law;

 

and there shall not be
implied into this Agreement any term or condition requiring any such provision
to be enforced, or such right or remedy to be exercised, within a certain or
reasonable time.

 

38

 

26                     NOTICES

 

26.1           General. Unless
otherwise specifically provided, any notice under, or in connection with, this
Agreement or the Security Documents shall be given by letter, fax or telex; and
references in this Agreement or the Security Documents to written notices,
notices in writing and notices signed by particular persons shall be construed
accordingly.

 

26.2           Addresses for
communications. A notice shall be sent:

 

(a)                     in the case
of notices to the Borrower, to:

 

	
   

  	
  Aegean Marine Petroleum
  S.A.

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  42 Hatzikyriakou Street

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Piraeus 185 38

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Greece

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Attention:

  	
  John Bekas

  
	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Tel. No:

  	
  + 30 210 458600

  
	
   

  	
  Fax No:

  	
  + 30 210 4586245

  
				

 

(b)                    in the case of
notices to the Lender, to each of:

 

	
   

  	
  The Royal Bank of
  Scotland plc

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  5th Floor

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  135 Bishopsgate

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  London EC2M 3UR

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Attention: 

  	
  John Franklin / John
  Lane

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  Risk & Portfolio
  Management

  
	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Tel. No:

  	
  + 44 207 085 6392

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  + 44 207 085 6389

  
	
   

  	
  Fax No:

  	
  + 44 207 085 8762

  
	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  The Royal Bank of
  Scotland plc

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  45 Akti Miaouli

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  185 36 Piraeus

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Greece

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Attention: 

  	
  Shipping Department

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  Tel. No:

  	
  + 30 210 459 6500

  
	
   

  	
  Fax No:

  	
  + 30 210 459 6600

  
				

 

or to such other address
as the relevant party may notify the other.

 

26.3           Effective date of
notices. Subject to Clauses 26.4 and 26.5:

 

(a)                     a notice
which is delivered personally or posted shall be deemed to be served, and shall
take effect, at the time when it is delivered; and

 

(b)                    a notice which
is sent by telex or fax shall be deemed to be served, and shall take effect, 2
hours after its transmission is completed.

 

26.4           Service outside
business hours. However, if under Clause 26.3 a notice would be deemed to
be served :

 

39

 

(a)                     on a day
which is not a business day in the place of receipt; or

 

(b)                    on such a
business day, but after 5 p.m. local time;

 

the notice shall (subject
to Clause 26.5) be deemed to be served, and shall take effect, at 9 a.m. on the
next day which is such a business day.

 

26.5           Illegible notices. Clauses
26.3 and 26.4 do not apply if the recipient of a notice notifies the sender
within one hour after the time at which the notice would otherwise be deemed to
be served that the notice has been received in a form which is illegible in a
material respect.

 

26.6           Valid notices. A
notice under or in connection with this Agreement shall not be invalid by
reason that its contents or the manner of serving it do not comply with the
requirements of this Agreement or the Security Documents if:

 

(a)                     the failure
to serve it in accordance with the requirements of this Agreement or the
Security Documents has not caused any party to suffer any significant loss or
prejudice; or

 

(b)                    in the case of
incorrect and/or incomplete contents, it should have been reasonably clear to the
party on which the notice was served what the correct or missing particulars
should have been.

 

26.7           English language. Any
notice under or in connection with this Agreement or the Security Documents
shall be in English.

 

26.8           Meaning of “notice”. In this Clause, “notice” includes any demand, consent, authorisation,
approval, instruction, waiver or other communication.

 

27                     SUPPLEMENTAL

 

27.1           Rights cumulative,
non-exclusive. The rights and remedies which this Agreement and the
Security Documents give to the Lender are:

 

(a)                     cumulative;

 

(b)                    may be
exercised as often as appears expedient; and

 

(c)                     not, unless
this Agreement or the Security Documents explicitly and specifically states so,
to be taken to exclude or limit any right or remedy conferred by any law.

 

27.2           Severability of
provisions. If any provision of this Agreement is or subsequently becomes
void, unenforceable or illegal, that shall not affect the validity,
enforceability or legality of the other provisions of this Agreement or of the
provisions of the Security Documents.

 

27.3           Counterparts. This
Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts.

 

27.4           Third party rights. A
person who is not a party to this Agreement has no right under the Contracts
(Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any
term of this Agreement.

 

28                     LAW AND
JURISDICTION

 

28.1           English law. This
Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, English law.

 

40

 

28.2           Exclusive English
jurisdiction. Subject to Clause 28.3, the courts of England shall have
exclusive jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in
connection with this Agreement.

 

28.3           Choice of forum for the
exclusive benefit of the Lender. Clause 28.2 is for the exclusive benefit
of the Lender, which reserves the rights:

 

(a)                     to commence
proceedings in relation to any matter which arises out of, or in connection
with, this Agreement in the courts of any country other than England and which
have or claim jurisdiction to that matter; and

 

(b)                    to commence
such proceedings in the courts of any such country or countries concurrently
with, or in addition to proceedings in England or without commencing
proceedings in England.

 

28.4           Process agent. The
Borrower irrevocably appoints Riches Consulting at its office for the time
being, presently at Old Jarretts Farmhouse, Brantridge Lane, Balcombe, West
Sussex, RH17 6JR, England, to act as its agent to receive and accept on its
behalf any process or other document relating to any proceedings in the English
courts which are connected with this Agreement.

 

28.5           Lender’s rights
unaffected. Nothing in this Clause 28 shall exclude or limit any right
which the Lender may have (whether under the law of any country, an international
convention or otherwise) with regard to the bringing of proceedings, the
service of process, the recognition or enforcement of a judgment or any similar
or related matter in any jurisdiction.

 

28.6           Meaning of
“proceedings”. In this Clause 28, “proceedings”
means proceedings of any kind, including an application for a
provisional or protective measure.

 

AS
WITNESS the hands of the duly authorised officers or
attorneys of the parties the day and year first before written.

 

41

 

EXECUTION PAGE

 

	
  SIGNED by

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  SPYRIDON FOKAS

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  for and on behalf of

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  AEGEAN MARINE

  	
  )

  	
  /s/ SPYRIDON FOKAS

  	
   

  
	
  PETROLEUM S.A.

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  in the presence of:

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  EVANGELIA CHATZIEFSTRATION

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  /s/ EVANGELIA CHATZIEFSTRATION

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  
	
  WATSON, FARLEY & WILLIAMS

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  2, DEFTERAS MERARCHIAS STR.

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  PIRAEUS 185 36

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  GREECE

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  
	
  SIGNED by

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  PAUL SULLIVAN

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  for and on behalf of

  	
  )

  	
  /s/ PAUL SULLIVAN

  	
   

  
	
  THE ROYAL BANK

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  OF SCOTLAND PLC

  	
  )

  	
   

  
	
  in the presence of:

  	
  )Exhibit 10.18

 

FULL SPECIFICATION

 

For

 

5500 DWT CLASS OIL TANKER

 

For BUNKERING SERVICE

 

(HULL NO.:
QHS-220,221,222,223,224)

 

 

	
   

  	
  On
  behalf of the Buyer

  	
   

  	
  On
  behalf of the Seller

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  /s/ E.S. Albertis

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  /s/ I.M. Chung

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  By:

  	
  E.S.
  Albertis

  	
   

  	
  By:

  	
  I.M. Chung

  
								

 

	
   

  	
  Title:

  	
  Technical
  Director

  	
   

  	
  Title:

  	
  President

  

 

 

QINGDAO
HYUNDAI SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.

 

 

Jan. 13th,
2006

5500DWT CLASS OIL TANKER BUILDING SPECIFICATION

 

1

 

CONTENT

 

	
  100

  	
  General Guidance and
  Administration

  	
  6

  
	
   

  	
  101 Intent, Scope and General Guidance

  	
  6

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  102 General Description

  	
  8

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  103 Class Notation and Flag

  	
  9

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  104 Regulations

  	
  9

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  105 Certificates

  	
  10

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  106 Material

  	
  11

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  107 Workmanship

  	
  11

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  108 Spare Parts, Tools and Accessories

  	
  11

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  109 Unit of Measure

  	
  12

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  110 Minimum Operating Temperature

  	
  12

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  111 Design Construction Standards

  	
  12

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  112 Language

  	
  12

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  113 Buyer Supplied Items

  	
  12

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  114 Hull Form &
  Model Test

  	
  13

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  115 Trim and Stability

  	
  13

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  116 Determination of Deadweight

  	
  15

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  117 Building Process

  	
  16

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  118 Dry Docking

  	
  16

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  119 Inspection Tests and Trials

  	
  16

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  120 Vibration and Noise

  	
  21

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  121 Plans For Approval

  	
  22

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  122 Finished Plan and Instruction Books

  	
  24

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  123 Name Plates and Identification

  	
  25

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  124 Delivery

  	
  25

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  125 Exemption

  	
  25

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  126 Insurance

  	
  26

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  127 Warranty

  	
  26

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  200

  	
  General Particulars

  	
  27

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  201 Principle Dimensions

  	
  27

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  202 Speed and Endurance

  	
  27

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  203 Installed Power

  	
  27

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  204 Deadweight and Capacity

  	
  28

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  205 Cargo List

  	
  28

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  206 Bow Thruster

  	
  28

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  207 Deck Heights, Sheer And Camber

  	
  29

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  208 Complement

  	
  29

  

 

2

 

	
  300

  	
  Hull Structure

  	
  29

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  301 General

  	
  29

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  307 Bottom Structure

  	
  33

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  308 Side Shell Structure

  	
  33

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  309 Decks

  	
  33

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  310 Pillars

  	
  33

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  312 Peak Tanks

  	
  34

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  313 Superstructure and Deck House

  	
  34

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  314 Rudder

  	
  35

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  315 Miscellaneous

  	
  35

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  401 General

  	
  388

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  402 Surface Preparation

  	
  38

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  403 [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
  39

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  404 Paint Works

  	
  40

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  405 Film Thickness

  	
  40

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  406 [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
  40

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  407 Inspection

  	
  40

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  408 General Cautions

  	
  40

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  409 Paint Schedule

  	
  411

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  410 Cathodic Protection

  	
  42

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  501 General

  	
  444

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  502 Desk Covering

  	
  44

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  503 Insulation and Fire Protection

  	
  45

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  504 Cabin Furnishing and Fittings

  	
  46

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  601 General

  	
  54

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  602 Auchor Windlasses

  	
  55

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  603 Steering Gear

  	
  55

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  604 Stern Mooring Winch

  	
  56

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  606 Hose Handling Crane

  	
  56

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  607 Mooring Fitting

  	
  56

  

 

3

 

	
   

  	
  608 Manifold

  	
  57

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  609 Oil Spill Drain Tank

  	
  57

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  610 Mooring Equipment

  	
  57

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  611 Ladders and Steps

  	
  58

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  612 Access Hatch and Manhole

  	
  58

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  613 Fendering

  	
  60

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  614 Life Saving Appliances

  	
  60

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  615 Personal Protection

  	
  61

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  616 Fire Fighting System

  	
  62

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  617 Fire Hydrant System

  	
  63

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  618 Foam Fire Extinguish System

  	
  64

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  619 CO2 Smothering System

  	
  64

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  620 Mist Spray Fire Fighting System

  	
  65

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  621 Fire and General Alarm System

  	
  65

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  700

  	
  Equipment for Cargo

  	
  66

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  701 General

  	
  66

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  702 Loading and Discharging System for Liquid Cargo

  	
  66

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  703 Cargo Heating System

  	
  69

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  704 Cargo Tank Vent/Gas Free System

  	
  69

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  705 Tank Cleaning System

  	
  70

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  706 Vapour Emission Control System

  	
  71

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  707 Auxiliary System & Equipment for Cargo

  	
  71

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  708 Cargo Control Room

  	
  72

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  709 Oily Water Discharge Monitoring and Control

  	
  72

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  710 Blender & Flowmeter

  	
  73

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  800

  	
  Ship’s Service System

  	
  74

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  801 Ballast System

  	
  744

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  802 Bilge Piping

  	
  74

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  803 Drainage System

  	
  75

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  804 Sounding System

  	
  75

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  805 Air-Conditioning System

  	
  76

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  806 Mechanical Ventilation

  	
  76

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  807 Natural Ventilation

  	
  78

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  808 Refrigerated Provision Store

  	
  788

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  900

  	
  Machinery Part

  	
  79

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  901 General

  	
  79

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  902 Principal Particulars of Machinery

  	
  80

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  903 Piping System in Engine Room

  	
  85

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  904 Workshop Machinery

  	
  87

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  905 Material for Pipes and Valves in E.R

  	
  87

  

 

4

 

	
   

  	
  906 Miscellaneous
  Equipment in Engine Room

  	
  90

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  907 Automatic Control
  and Monitoring Instrumentation

  	
  90

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
  94

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1004 Primary Source

  	
  96

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1005 Secondary Source

  	
  97

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1006 Main Switchboard

  	
  98

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1007 Emergency
  Switchboard

  	
  99

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1009 Distribution
  System

  	
  100

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1010 Power System

  	
  101

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1011 Operation And
  Control Of Generator

  	
  102

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1013 [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
  102

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1014 Navigation Lights
  and Signal Lights

  	
  103

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1015 Internal Communication
  & Alarm System

  	
  104

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  1016 Nautical Equipment

  	
  106

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
  [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
  106

  

 

5

 

100 General Guidance and
Administration

 

101 Intent, Scope and
General Guidance

 

This specification and
accompanying plan are intended to describe the details of technical matters in
the Contract and the design material, construction and equipment of a sea going
single screw fixed pitch propeller diesel engine driven 5500 DWT Oil Tanker
suitable to transport & supply of the bunker fuel, including clean and dirty oil products in bulk. The maximum
specific gravity of cargo oil shall be 1.025[ILLEGIBLE] in all cargo tanks and
slop tanks. The flash point of these liquid cargoes can be below 60oC. The
Tanker shall be build to the best commercial marine practice with Unrestricted
Ocean – Going Service.

 

The accompanying plans
listed below shall form an integral part of the specifications:

 

General Arrangement Plan
(B-101)

Midship Section Drawing (Subject to the change as per rule requirement) (H-101)

Cargo Oil Piping System (M-410)

Maker List

 

This specification and
accompanied drawings shall form an integral part of the contract.

 

The vessel will be
designed, constructed, equipped, tested and delivered to the Buyer by the
Builder in accordance with the building contract and the specification.

 

Details in design,
construction, fabrication, installation, inspection, tests, workmanship etc. not covered
by these Specifications shall be in accordance with the Builder’s,
Subcontractor’s/Manufacturer’s practices based on the appropriate standards for
this kind of vessel being
adopted at the time of Vessel’s construction.

 

Materials, apparatus and
equipment shall be in accordance with the ISO, and Chinese Shipbuilding
standard.

 

Any item or construction
necessary to complete the vessel safe and workable for its intended purpose
shall be supplied and installed by the Builder whether mentioned in the
Specification or not as a mutual agreement between the Builder and the Buyer.

 

It is to be understood
that anything not mentioned in these Specifications but required by the
Classification Society or Regulatory Bodies listed herein, shall be supplied
and/or equipped by the Builder.

 

Any requirement of the
Buyer, which is in excess of the requirements of the Rules and Regulations
5500DWT CLASS OIL TANKER FULL SPECIFICATION as specified in 104 and 105 and/or
the content of this specifications shall be subject to adjustment to the
contract price, deadweight, speed, cargo cubic
capacity, consumption, which may be effected, notified in writing by the Builder and accepted in writing by the Buyer. If the same item is repeated
twice or more in these Specifications, it is to be understood that these items
shall be supplied and/or equipped once only.

 

If any inconsistency is
found between the Contract, Specification and/or accompanied plans, the former
one shall prevail and govern unless otherwise agreed.

 

If any inconsistency is
found between the Hull, Machinery and Electric Specifications, the description
of the Specifications which governs the installation or equipment shall
prevail.

 

Any amendments or changes
in Rules and Regulations as described in 104 and 105 issued and coming into
effect after signing the Contract, is to be treated as a modification to the
Contract. The price of changing Contract shall be subject to separate
negotiations between the Buyer and the Builder.

 

6

 

Any amendment or changes
in this Specification and/or Plans shall be treated in a similar way as
Contract.

 

These amendments or
changes shall come into effect after the agreement is reached between the Buyer
and the Builder, and a written consent has to be signed between both parties.

 

component, the term “or
equal” shall mean that any substitute shall be of equivalent standard and quality.

 

Where ever in the
Specification the term “or”, “if necessary”, when considered” and other similar
expressions may be used, the final choice in all important matters are to be
made by mutual agreement between Builder and Buyer.

 

Details in design,
construction, installation, inspection, test, workmanship etc., not covered by
the Specification, shall be in accordance with good international shipbuilding
practices based on the appropriate standards for this kind of Vessel being
adopted at the time of Vessel’s construction, being generally used by
international shipyards and agreed by the Buyer.

 

[ILLEGIBLE]

 

The description in 100
General Guidance and Administration shall be applied to all parts of the Specification,
whereas in the parts the description to be applied to the respective parts, if
not stated otherwise.

 

to
be suitable for following environmental condition:

 

Ambient air temperature
45oC

Air temperature in engine room 45oC

Sea water temperature 32oC

Fresh water temperature 38oC

Inside temperature 25oC

 

Maximum noise level shall
refer to IMO Resolution A468 (XII) “Code on Noise Level on Board Ships” but
shall try the yard’s best not to exceed the following:

 

[ILLEGIBLE]

Office/Control Rooms: 65 db

Mess Rooms: 65 db

Galley, Laundry With Equipment Running: 80 db

Galley, Laundry Without Equipment Running: 70 db

Private Cabins and
Infirmary: 60 db

Engine Control Room: 75 db

 

7

 

Work Shop: 85 db

Steering Gear Room: 110 db

 

Makers List:

All equipment shall be
selected out of the makers listed in the attached makers list. The Builder
shall be able to use any of the maker on the makers list. The Buyer reserves
the right to use the preference maker and the Buyer shall cover the cost in
difference between the one selected by the Builder on the maker list and the
preference one.

 

102 General Description

 

This ship is an Oil
Bunkering Tanker designed primary to load/discharge and carry bunkering fuel.
The deadweight of the vessel is 5500 metric tons at design draft. All cargo tanks, slop tanks shall be able
to fully load cargoes with specific gravity up to 1,025 mt/m3. The scantling of cargo
tanks’ structure shall enable alternative loading. The cargo tanks/slop tanks
shall be suitable for cargo with
flash point under 60°C.

 

The vessel shall be
designed as modern looking oil tanker with separate funnel, a free fall boat on
stern and a streamlined bulbous bow construction. The design shall be approved
by the Buyer prior to the construction.

 

There are fix (5) pairs
of cargo oil tanks and one(l) pairs of slop tanks under main deck. The cargo
oil tanks, slop tanks are of mild steel with internal surround coat. Six pairs
of ballast tank are arranged at the wing tank and double bottom tank within the
cargo oil space. Fore peak shall be used as water ballast tank as well.

 

Two sets of twin screw
type pumps with 750 m3/h
with the specific gravity 0.8 t/m3 at 1 cst 50 degree centigrade, serving
for two grades cargo and one (1) set
of screw type cargo pump with 300 m3/h
serving for another grade cargo.

 

The cargo pumps are
located in the pump room and each pump is driven by an independent diesel
engine. All pumps can be operated/controlled from Cargo Control Room (CCR).

 

The cargo oil
loading/discharging piping system is able to load and discharge three (3)
different grades of cargo oil simultaneously without contamination. The cargo
lines and drop lines for all cargo tanks, slop tanks shall be provided.

 

The engine room to be separated
from cargo spaces by means of
cargo pump room and fuel oil/marine diesel oil tanks.

 

Propulsion is provided by
means of one marine diesel medium speed engines located in the engine room
after. One fixed pitch propeller is installed and is driven by the reversible
gearbox.

 

Maneuvering
is accomplished via one streamlined rudder and one electrically driven bow
thruster.

 

Electrical power shall be
generated by one generator during voyage. However the maximum sea electrical
load shall not exceed the 80% of the power of the generator subject to the load
balance calculation. Accommodation for 18 crews is provided at the after part
of the ship. In order to reduce the vibration and noise, crew’s accommodations,
bridge, etc. shall be located at the forepart of deck house, funnel shall be
arranged on accommodation deck. The arrangement of the accommodation shall be
approved by the Buyer before
construction.

 

One light mast shall be arranged at the end of forecastle, one
signal mast (radar mast) shall be arranged at the top of the bridge. And also
one flood light post shall be provided near the midship

 

8

 

manifold, port and
starboard respectively.

 

103 Class Notation and
Flag

 

The vessel including its
hull, machinery and equipment shall be build to the class of Lloyd Register of
shipping (LR) (hereinafter called the “Classification Society” Or “Class”) or
equivalent classification society (will be decided by the Buyer) with following
notation:

 

+100A1 Double Hull Oil
Tanker, ESP, LI, +LMC, CCS, descriptive notes “Shipright BWMP(S or F) &
Shipright (SCM)”

 

The vessel will be
registered under the Liberian Flag. Owner may choose Greek Flag as an option.
Owner shall provide all detail for the costing and relative regulation to
comply with.

 

104 Regulations

 

The vessel must comply
with the flag authorities and following international rules and regulations.

All rules and regulations
shall be updated with latest amendments if any.

 

	
  100

  	
   

  	
  Rules and Regulations of the Classification Society
  2004 and it’s Amendments (hereinafter called as “CLASS Rules”)

  
	
  101

  	
   

  	
  National Maritime regulation of the Country of
  Registry

  
	
  102

  	
   

  	
  International Convention for the Safety of Life at
  Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), including first Amendments 1978, second set of Amendments
  1981, 1983, 1988(GMDSS), 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1994, 1996, 1997, 1998, 2000
  and up to 2004.

  
	
  103

  	
   

  	
  Including Ship Identification Number (SOLAS Ch. XI-I
  Reg.3) and Ship Security Alert System (SOLAS amendment Ch. XI-2 Reg.6)

  
	
  104

  	
   

  	
  International Convention for the Prevention of
  Pollution from Ships, (MARPOL 1973/78) and Amendments of 1984, 1985, 1987,
  1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1994, 1997 and 1998 including Reg. 13F and Annex I,
  IV, V and VI for Nox. Also including new type oily water separator capable of
  coping with emulsified fuels IMO Res. MEPC 107 (49), incinerator to meet Res.
  MEPC 76(40).

  
	
  105

  	
   

  	
  Convention on the International Regulations for
  Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972(COLREG 1972) and Amendments of 1981, 1987
  and 1989, 1993.

  
	
  106

  	
   

  	
  International Convention on Load Lines 1966 and
  Amendments of 1971, 1975, 1979 and protocol 1988 as amended by MSC 143(77).

  
	
  107

  	
   

  	
  International Conversion on Tonnage Measurement of
  ships, 1969.

  
	
  108

  	
   

  	
  International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
  Regulation for Electrical Installation on Ships.

  
	
  105

  	
   

  	
  IMO Resolution A-468 (XII), Code on Noise levels on
  board ships

  
	
  106

  	
   

  	
  ILO Concerning Crew Accommodation on Board (No.92
  & No.133)

  
	
  107

  	
   

  	
  ISO No.6954 Guidelines for the Overall Evaluation of
  Vibration in Merchant Ships, 1979 and its Amendments of 1984.

  
	
  108

  	
   

  	
  OCIMF— Standards for Tanker Manifolds, Mooring and
  Associated Equipment 1998 for reference only.

  
	
  109

  	
   

  	
  IMO Standards & instructions concerning
  ventilation cleaning and gas-freeing of oil tanks.

  
	
  110

  	
   

  	
  Exxon Minimum Safety Requirements, 2000 (for
  reference only)

  
	
  111

  	
   

  	
  Texaco-Chevron Requirement (for reference only).

  
	
  112

  	
   

  	
  IMO draft guidelines on Navigation Bridge
  Visibility.

  
	
  113

  	
   

  	
  IMO Resolution A.751 (XVII) Interim Standards for
  Ship Maneuverability.

  
	
  114

  	
   

  	
  Suez Canal Navigation Rules Tonnage measurements

  
	
  115

  	
   

  	
  Panama Canal Commission, MR Notice to Shipping No.
  N-1-95 and Regulations for Tonnage Measurement. (Document for Panama Canal
  tonnage certificate issued by

  

 

9

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Canal Authority to be provided by the Builder)

  
	
  116

  	
   

  	
  ISO 1940 — Balance quality requirements of rigid
  rotors.

  
	
  117

  	
   

  	
  USCG regulations applying to foreign flag vessels
  entering navigable waters or U.S. territory incl. pollution prevention
  including NOX control system.

  
	
  118

  	
   

  	
  International Telecommunication Union Radio
  Regulation 1990.

  
	
  119

  	
   

  	
  IMO Res. 868 (20) Guide Lines for Ballast Water
  Exchange.

  
	
  120

  	
   

  	
  International Maritime Pilots Association About
  Pilot boarding Arrangement.

  
	
  121

  	
   

  	
  EU Marine Equipment Director, if available

  
	
  122

  	
   

  	
  VECS Regulation (USCG 46CFR39)

  
	
  123

  	
   

  	
  Anti-Fouling Convention

  

 

105 Certificates

 

The builder shall obtain
following certificates and deliver to buyer at the time of the ship’s delivery
unless otherwise mentioned. Each certificate shall be delivered as triplicates,
one original and two copies.

 

	
  No.

  	
   

  	
  Name of Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Issued by

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Classification Certificate for Class Notation

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  International Load Line Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  3

  	
   

  	
  Safety Construction Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  4

  	
   

  	
  Safety Equipment Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  5

  	
   

  	
  Safety Radiotelephone Certificate, incl. GMDSS A1 +
  A2 + A3

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  6

  	
   

  	
  Safety Cargo Gear Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  7

  	
   

  	
  Classification Certificates for Anchor, Chains and
  Hawsers, Machinery and Equipment.

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  8

  	
   

  	
  Certificate for Life Boats & Life Saving
  Equipment

  	
   

  	
  Builder/Class

  
	
  9

  	
   

  	
  Certificate for Navigation Light & Special
  Signal Light

  	
   

  	
  Builder/Class

  
	
  10

  	
   

  	
  Certificate for Crews’ Accommodation

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  11

  	
   

  	
  Certificate for Deadweight

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  12

  	
   

  	
  International Tonnage Certificate, including the SBT
  calculation.

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  13

  	
   

  	
  International Oil Pollution Prevention Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  14

  	
   

  	
  Certificate for Compass Adjustment & DGPS.

  	
   

  	
  Builder

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  15

  	
   

  	
  Cargo Tank Calibration Tables the parties will be
  mutual agreed between buyer and builder

  	
   

  	
  Authorized Party In China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  16

  	
   

  	
  Derating Exemption Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Chinese Government

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  17

  	
   

  	
  Certificate for Magnetic Compass

  	
   

  	
  Builder

  
	
  18

  	
   

  	
  Builder’s Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Builder

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  19

  	
   

  	
  SOLAS Training Manual incl. The FSOP (Fire Safety
  Operation Plan Manual)

  	
   

  	
  Buyer/Class

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  20

  	
   

  	
  Panama Canal Tonnage Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Builder/Class

  
	
  21

  	
   

  	
  Suez Canal Tonnage Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Builder/Class

  
	
  22

  	
   

  	
  Certificate for Marine Vapour Control System

  	
   

  	
  Builder/Class

  
	
  23

  	
   

  	
  Letter of Compliance or Certificate for ILO (92
  & 133)

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  24

  	
   

  	
  International Sewage Pollution Prevention
  Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  25

  	
   

  	
  Certificate of EIAPP

  	
   

  	
  Maker or Class

  
	
  26

  	
   

  	
  Certificate of International Air Pollution
  Prevention

  	
   

  	
  Class

  

 

10

 

	
  27

  	
   

  	
  International Garbage Pollution Prevention
  Certificate

  	
   

  	
  Class

  
	
  28

  	
   

  	
  Asbestos free Shipbuilding

  	
   

  	
  Builder

  

 

106 Material

 

Structural steel material
of main hull structure shall be of quality as required by the Class and shall
be free of cracks, lamination, surface defects and other similar defects.

 

Manufacturer’s standard
type, size and materials of machinery, equipment and fittings shall be adopted,
unless otherwise specifically described in the Specification provided above
reference to standards are met and provided according to good international
standard.

 

If any of the materials
or equipment described in the Specification is not available, the Builder may
supply other materials or equipment capable of meeting the requirements of the
Classification Society and of the Rules and Regulations.

 

Substitution of the
materials or equipment shall be subject to the provisions of the Contract.

 

No asbestos to be used in
on the Vessel.

 

Quality and
constructional arrangement shall be made to ensure easy and future maintenance
as far as practically possible for all machinery and equipment.

 

If any of the specific
description for the machinery or equipment in the Specification is not
consistent with the finally selected manufacturer’s standard specification,
then the detail design shall follow the manufacturer’s standard specification,
provided the manufacturer’s standards are according to good international
standard.

 

Stainless steel without
grade notation in the specification shall mean Chinese Standard SUS 304.

 

Grease nipples shall be
of pin type or equivalent ISO standard, but only one type to be used throughout
the vessel at Builder’s option. The type of the grease nipples can be selected
as per the mutual agreement by the Buyer and the Builder during construction.

 

All materials shall be
new and unused.

 

Damages occurring to
materials shall be suitably corrected or replaced with new before delivery of
the vessel.

 

107 Workmanship

 

All workmanship used in
the construction of the vessel shall be in accordance with good international
shipbuilding practice and all applicable rules, regulations and standards.

 

Special care shall be
paid to secure easy future maintenance for all constructional/design
arrangement.

 

108 Spare Parts, Tools
and Accessories

 

Spare parts, tools and
accessories for the machinery and equipment shall be supplied in accordance
with the Class recommendations and the manufacturer’s standards, unless
otherwise

 

11

 

specifically described in
the Specification. A reasonable amount of additional spare parts supplied by
the Buyer shall, however, be placed onboard during the outfitting period
without extra cost. All heavy spares supplied by the Builder/Buyer will be
fitted on stands and safely
secured.

 

Following spares shall be
equipped in addition to the above items by the Builder:

•    One spare anchor for each
vessel.

•    One fixed pitch propeller with
hub as applicable for each vessel.

 

109 Unit of Measure

 

Metric system shall be
adopted for design and construction of hull, machinery, equipment, etc. in
general.

 

All measuring units such
as power, pressure gauge, thermometer, volume gauge, tanks scales etc., to be
in accordance with metric system unless specially required by the Buyer’s at
early designing stage. The material of all gauges shall be of mutual agreed by
the Buyer and the Builder.

 

110 Minimum Operating
Temperature

 

The minimum operating
temperature of all exposed deck equipment such as, but not limited to, cranes,
windlasses, hydraulic aggregates, hatch covers, navigating equipment shall be
minus twenty five (-25) degrees Centigrade.

 

111 Design Construction
Standards

 

The following standards
to be applied on construction of the vessel:

 

	
  Chinese Industrial
  Standard

  	
   

  	
  (GB)

  
	
  Chinese Shipbuilding
  Standard

  	
   

  	
  (CB)

  

 

Builder’s Engineering
Standard Applied For Export Vessels (To be submitted to the Buyer for
reference)

	
  Chinese Metallurgical Standard

  	
   

  	
  (YB)

  
	
  Chinese Machinery and Electric Standard

  	
   

  	
  (JB)

  

 

The ISO Standard to be
applied as far as possible.

Special care to be paid
of having standard for securing inter changeability of flanges, grease nipples
etc.

 

112 Language

 

All documents and
drawings for design and construction of the Vessel which shall be submitted to
the Buyer shall be prepared in English.

 

113 Buyer Supplied Items

 

Following items shall be
furnished and supplied by the Buyer at their own expense, and received, stored
and installed on the vessel by the Builder, Sockets, cabling and etc. for the
Owner’s supply TV sets radio sets, computers, communication/navigation
equipment etc., shall be supplied and

 

12

 

fitted by the Builder.
The Owner shall indicate the above items and spot to be placed before the
drawing are approved by the Class.

 

•    All hoses, etc., other than
those required by the Rules, or mentioned in this Specification.

•    Steel wires, ropes and hawsers
for mooring in excess of the requirement of the Classification Society and/or
this specification.

•    Deck, engine and cabin stores
in excess of those specified in this Specification.

•    All bedding (pillows,
blankets, sheets, covers, etc.) but excluding mattresses.

•    All napery (serviettes, table
cloths, etc.)

•    All cook’s and steward’s
utensils (crockery, cutlery, silver-wares, china, glasses, pots, pans, etc.)

•    All chandlery (soaps, lamp
oil, etc. ) toilet papers, food and other consumables.

•    All charts, sailing books and
flags.

•    All consumables stores.

•    All medicine and medical
equipment.

•    All air tools and hoses except
those specified herein.

•    Personal calculators.

•    Recreational equipment other
than mentioned in this Specification.

•    Typewriter and other office
machines.

•    Hand tools other than
specified in Specification.

•    Broadcasting radio receivers
and stereophony (sockets installed by Builder).

•    Electric coffee grinder
electric cutting machine, juice maker, small electric boiler for galley and
decimal balance, electric ironing machine and etc.

•    Paintings and pictures.

•    All TV sets, radios, stereo
sets, DVD sets and etc.

•    Spare parts, tools, navigation
equipment, flags, etc., in excess of the requirements of the Rules and
Regulations as specified herein and/or those specified in this Specification.

•    Water, fuel oil, lubricants
and grease, working oil for deck machinery, all consumable liquids or gas
including remaining L.O. in pipe etc. to be of the Buyer’s account excepting
those which have been consumed in trials and tests which are to be borne by the
Builder.

 

114 Hull Form & Model
Test

 

The Builder is to design
the hull form propeller and rudder suitable for the vessel’s speed and
performance.

 

The vessel shall have
bulbous bow, raked stern and transom stern. The fore end of the bulb shall not
protrude beyond the fore end of the forecastle bulwark

 

The builder to submit
report of model tank test estimated fuel oil consumption and ship’s speed at
ballasted draft, designed draft for suitable range of main engine RPM to Buyer.

 

Model tests to include
the following:

 

Resistance tests at the
ballasting draft, designed draft.

Self-propulsion tests
with stock propeller at the ballasting draft, design draft.

 

115 Trim and Stability

 

Trim adjustment by using
ballast water obtain approximately even keel at fully load arrival condition
shall be possible.

 

At the preliminary stage,
the Builder will submit trim and stability calculations to the Buyer at the
following loading conditions intended for the ship’s services.

 

13

 

•    Light ship.

•    Homogeneously loaded condition
at scantling draft. Departure and arrival. Homogeneously based on the design
specific gravity

•    Group loading condition.
Departure and arrival.

•    Ballast condition, Departure
and arrival.

•    Dry docking.

•    Tanks 2, 4 and 6 empty rest
full.

•    Tanks 1, 3 and 5 empty rest
full

•    Tanks 3 and 5 full rest empty

•    Tanks 2, 3 and 4 full rest
empty

•    Tanks 3, 4 and 5 fully rest
empty

•    All tanks empty only one pair
full (Any pair)

 

“Departure condition”
shall be based on the full supplies of bankers and other consumables, and “Arrival
condition” on approx. 10% supplies of departure condition.

 

Final trim and stability
calculation for above loading conditions shall be made on the basis of the
center of gravity and the light weight of the Vessel obtained from the
inclining experiment.

 

Specific gravity of water
and oil for the trim and stability calculation shall be as follows:

 

Sea water: 1.025

Fresh water: 1.00

Heavy fuel oil: 0.98

Diesel oil: 0.85

Lub. oil: 0.90

Cargo Oil: 1.025

 

Both intact stability and
damage stability calculation shall be carried out according to latest
regulation as

 

Intact Stability

•    IMO A 749

•    MARPOL 25A

 

Damage Stability

•    MARPOL 25

 

The vessel shall always
comply with the above damage stability criteria’s without the need to taken any
ballast when vessel is loaded with a full homogeneously deadweight cargo.

 

Hydrostatic tables, light
ship weight with centers of gravity and longitudinal weight distribution to be
supplied to the Buyer at an early stage of the design.

 

Loading conditions shall
include calculations of longitudinal hull ginder bending moment and shear
force.

 

It shall be demonstrated
that the hull ginder bending moment and shear force for all loading conditions
are below the allowable limits required by Class.

 

Preliminary Trim and
Stability (Intact & Damaged) Booklet including bending moment and shear
force calculation will be submitted to buyer at an early design stage.

 

14

 

A preliminary Capacity
Plan to be submitted together with the preliminary loading conditions.

 

If the final trim and
stability booklet is under process of approval by the Classification Society
and/or other assigned Authority, the Builder shall provide the provisional trim
and stability booklet upon the delivery of the Vessel, which will not expire
before issuance of the final booklet.

 

When the vessel is
substantially incompleted, an inclining experiment to be carried out to
ascertain the position of center of gravity of the vessel at the finished light
condition.

 

(1) Substantially complete
shall mean that only some minor works remain as agreed by Class and Buyer.

 

The inclining experiment
shall be carried out in the presence of Buyer’s Representative(s) and the
Classification Society surveyor. The procedure of inclining experiment and deadweight
measurement prepared by the Builder shall be approved by the Classification
Society or other assigned Authority.

 

Slack tanks shall be
avoided as far as practicable, free surface of remaining tanks shall be easy
controllable.

 

The results of the
experiment shall be submitted to the Classification Society or other assigned
Authority for approval.

 

The Builder will send the
results for Buyer’s approval or comments, if any.

 

In case of series of
sister vessels, the inclining experiment shall be carried out only for the
first vessel of the series, if not otherwise required by Classification
Society.

 

116 Determination of
Deadweight

 

The deadweight is to be
expressed in metric tons unit.

 

The deadweight is to be
difference between the displacement including shell and appendages of the
vessel at the design draught of 6.0 meters in sea water with specific gravity
of 1.025 and the light weight, which consists of following items:

 

•    Hull steel.

•    Fixed fittings, equipment and
inventories as per rule requirement.

•    Machinery in dry condition
other than mentioned in here after.

•    Spare parts and tools in
accordance with the class requirements.

•    Fuel oil in main engine,
auxiliary engines and in supply piping from the outlet of service tanks to each
engine.

•    Lub. oil in main engine and
auxiliary engines, in coolers for main engine and auxiliary engines and in
circulating piping from sump tank to each engine.

•    Hydraulic oil in hydraulic
power units & hydraulic pipe (excluding the hydraulic storage tanks).

•    Fresh water in main engine,
auxiliary engines, fresh water coolers for main engine and closed circulating
piping from and to cooling fresh water pumps through the engine.

 

The following items shall
not be included in the light weight:

 

•    Spare parts and tools which
exceed the manufacturer’s standards and Class requirements

•    All consumables stores

•    Articles supplied by the
Buyer, which is not defined as part of the lightship

•    Crew and their effects

•    Oil and water in hull piping
and tanks

 

Others not mentioned
as light weight items.

 

15

 

117 Building Process

 

Construction and
outfitting of the vessel to be made under the Builder’s building process and
practice specified hereunder.

 

Suitable size of blocks
shall be assembled at shop in general and then erected on building berth or at
building dock.

 

In general, if auxiliary
machinery (except generators), beds or seats for such auxiliary machinery,
pipes, valves, etc. shall be assembled and if required inspected at shop as a
unit, then, such unit shall be brought onboard the vessel and installed.

 

After installation of
such units in the vessel, centering of the auxiliary machinery shall be checked
by the Builder and corrected by shims if necessary. The auxiliary machinery and
accessories fitted in such units shall not be dismantled for such checking
purpose unless otherwise considered necessary. The Buyer’s supervisor
(hereinafter called “the supervisor”) shall be informed and attend the checking
of the centering.

 

Excessive misalignment
shall not be allowed to correct by shims, Class to decide whether a
misalignment is excessive or not. The maker’s recommendations and alignment
tolerances shall be adhere to.

 

118 Dry Docking

 

Vessel shall be
dry-docked for hull cleaning and paint repair if vessel is not delivered to the
Buyer within six months after launching or proven the ship is foul. For the
shorter interval, if there is cause of concern an underwater survey shall be
carried out with the Class attendance. If there is any critical issue is found,
the Builder will bear the cost otherwise the Buyer will bear the cost and be in
charge for the delay of the schedule.

 

119 Inspection Tests and
Trials

 

1191 General

 

The vessel’s
construction, machineries, outfits and equipments shall be inspected and tested
under the presence of the Buyer’s Representative(s) and/or the Surveyor(s) from
the Classification Society and other various Regulatory Bodies in accordance
with the respective Rule’s requirement.

 

The Builder shall at all
time keep the Buyer advised in every respect of the programs of work and upon
request, methods which he intends to use. Notices of major events, tests and
trial shall be given sufficiently in advance to the Buyer to permit them or the
person they designate to make necessary arrangement in order to attend the
tests or event.

 

All necessary drawings
and information which are required for the inspector or permit him to carry out
his work and keep the Buyer advised of construction details and work progress,
shall be made available to him upon request.

 

Inspection by the Buyer’s
Representative(s) shall be regarded as a verification of the Builder own
quality controls measures and shall not be used as a substitute for the Builder’s
quality control.

 

16

 

In case the Buyer’s
Representative(s) in unable to attend any test, he may designate a person to
act on his behalf, otherwise the Buyer’s Representative(s) shall waive the
right to have comments for such test, provided notice is given as agreed.

 

Whenever materials,
equipment and machinery etc., have been tested and inspected by the Buyer’s
Representative(s), such material and equipment shall be clearly marked and
assigned to the vessel. Such materials and equipment shall not be exchanged
with any other without the Buyer’s written consent.

 

At the acceptance
inspection each space shall be completely clean and finally painted if/as
specified and fitted out in accordance with specification.

 

All welding seams shall
be tested before paint is applied.

 

All pipes shall be proven
right and free of internal obstruction.

 

Electric cabling and
equipment shall have a satisfactory megger test and prove operational. The
megger test is testing result of insulation for major electric equipment (with
motor over 3KW). The test results shall be summarized and submitted to the
Buyer.

 

Schedules and test
programs for major equipment as mutually agreed by the Buyer and the Builder
for inspection shall be submitted to the Buyer’s Representative(s) at least two
weeks prior to the test.

 

Application for
inspections shall be submitted to the Buyer’s Representative(s) one day before
inspection if such inspection is in the Yard.

 

In general, all work
equipment, machinery, systems etc. whether belonging to hull part or machinery
part shall be tested sufficiently onboard to prove specified performance, safe
operation, suitability in service compliance with all applicable Rules and
Regulations in the Specification.

 

The Builder is to deliver
the vessel in a clean and freshly painted condition, all valves, wires,
machinery oiled and greased, refrigerated stores cooled down to operating
temperatures, hatches, booms and stores securely stowed and ready for sea
going.

 

1192 Progress

 

The Builder is to provide
the Buyer the progress report once every month during the construction. In case
the Builder falls behind the intended schedule, the Builder shall try all
possible efforts to bring the vessel back on schedule in order to meet delivery
date.

 

Builder’s standard
programs for inspection, test and trials shall be submitted to Buyer for
review/comment.

 

1193 Tests and Inspection

 

11931 Hull Structure Tests

 

All steel structures to
be inspected and tightness to be tested for tanks, bulkheads and superstructure
deck and other wet space etc. as required by the Class Rules.

 

Tank shall be tested
hydrostatically or by air as required by the “Class Rules”.

 

X-ray photographs or
ultrasonic inspection to be taken mainly from cross-points of seams and butts
block assemblies of bottom shell, bilge strake, main deck and sheer strake as
required by the

 

17

 

“Class Rules”.

 

11932 Hull Inspection

 

The block inspection
shall be carried out after completion of hull block street works. If fittings
are fitted wholly or partially to the hull blocks, the inspection for the hull
blocks shall be carried out without dismantling such fittings provided
satisfactory access to all hull parts.

 

The internal inspection
for hull construction works of tanks, engine room, etc. to be carried out even
if outfitting works in such spaces have not been finished yet but any works in
connection with strength and tightness of the hull construction shall be
completed before the said inspections, in which case, after completion of the
outfitting work, final inspection of such parts to be made in accordance with
the mutual agreement between Buyer’s Representative(s) and Builder.

 

Inspection of the hull
construction shall be made before any paint work is done.

 

11933 Installations and Equipments

 

Installations and
equipment shall be tested on board in accordance with the “Class Rules” and/or
Regulatory bodies and the standard of the Builder and approved by the Buyer.

 

Shop tests shall be
carried out for the machinery and equipment by the manufacturers at their
shops.

 

Test results of major
machinery and equipment shall be furnished to the Buyer in triplicate.

 

The Buyer shall be
informed of the shop test schedule at least seven days in advance of the
expected date of the shop tests and the Buyer’s attendance shall confirm with
the Builder four days in advance of the expected date of the shop test.

 

11934 Piping Test

 

As far as hydrostatic
test in practicable for a part of piping system, such test shall be made for
such part before completion of the whole system.

 

Working test shall be
carried out after completion of the piping system.

 

Pressure test at 1.1
times of the working pressure shall be carried out for all cargo oil system
pipes and hydraulic system pipes after installation on board.

 

1194 Mooring Trial

 

Mooring trial for the
main engine with associated auxiliary machinery and equipment shall be carried
out prior to the sea trial while the Vessel is moored at the Builder’s quay as
followings:

 

•    Confirmation of starting
position.

•    Turning gear interlock test.

•    Confirmation of control
position.

•    Safety device test (automatic
trip by simulation).

•    Minimum revolution test
without load

•    Test of starting air capacity.

•    Inspection of crankcase.

•    Main engine running at half
hour without load.

 

18

 

1195 Sea Trial

 

When the vessel is
substantially completed, sea trial tests shall be carried out by the Builder in
accordance with the sea trial procedure which shall be prepared by the Builder
according to Class requirements and Testing of New Ships and Builder’s
standard, and shall be submitted to the Buyer for approval.

 

Marine diesel oil with
viscosity as available on the domestic market shall be used during the sea
trial.

 

Sea trial shall be
carried out at the design draft with suitable trim.

 

Sea trial to ascertain
that the vessel conforms with the terms of the contract and specification.

 

11951 Progressive Speed Trial

 

Speed trial for the
assessment of the guaranteed speed performance shall be conducted in deep
water, by means of the GPS and shaft power to be measured by torsion meter.

 

Results of speed trials
shall be corrected to the calm water (no wind, wave) if the sea is at the rough
sea condition. The measured trial speed shall be corrected to the value under
calm and deep sea conditions accordance with the literature “On a new Method of
Correction for Wind Resistance Relating to Analysis of Speed Trial Results” by
NSMB method.

 

The corrections shall be
carried out by Builder and approved by Buyer.

 

The progressive speed
trial shall consist of two (2) double run (alternating in direction) at main
engine loads MCR.

 

11952 Endurance Trial

 

Endurance trial shall be
conducted for four hours at CSR load and one hour at MCR. The measurement of
the marine diesel oil consumption shall be carried out by the flow meter for
reference if the flow meter is installed.

 

11953 Starting Test

 

Number of consecutive
starts and minimum starting air pressure for the main engine will be in
accordance with Class requirement and measured without recharging the air
reservoir.

 

11954 Steering Gear Test

 

Steering trial to be
performed at a speed in accordance with the Rule requirement and under design
draft condition, by steering control from the wheelhouse and auxiliary steering
control in the steering gear room.

 

•    With the vessel navigating
ahead at the rated rpm, the time required to put the rudder from 35°
at one side to 30° to the other side while working on both steering
gear pumps shall be recorded. The test to be repeated with the rudder initially
at the other side.

 

•    The tests to be repeated with
one steering gear pump running.

 

•    The tests to be repeated while
working in each local control steering gear pump push buttons.

 

 

19

 

11955 Turning Test

 

Turning circle to be
measured at normal output of main engine, port and starboard, when helm angle
is taken to 35°.

 

•    Turning circle tests, with
helm angle of 35° port/starboard

•    Crash stop tests, ahead and
astern.

 

From running ahead at
service speed, with ME running at CSR, to astern with engine running at about
60% MCR, with the rudder at 0°
angle.

 

•    10°/10°
zig-zag test at service speed

•    Spiral test at service and
maneuvering speed

 

•    Maneuvering information
required by regulatory bodies shall be produced from these tests.

•    Bow thruster operation test.

•    Inertia test

 

11956 Minimum Revolution Speed Test

 

Minimum Shaft speed at
which the main engine is capable of continuous running when maneuvering will be
measured.

 

11957 Torsional Vibration Test

 

Torsional vibration
amplitude of the main shafting shall be measured at various shaft revolution as
per Class Requirement.

 

11958 Local Vibration Test

 

Local vibration shall be
measured where necessary as per Regulation of ISO 6954.

 

11959 Adjustment of Magnetic Compass

 

Magnetic compass shall be
adjusted and certified by the Builder.

 

119510 Test/Calibration/Adjustment of Navigation
Equipment

 

Test, calibration and
adjustment of navigation equipment and instrument such as gyro compass,
magnetic compass, auto-pilot, echo sounder, speed log and radar system etc.

 

119511 Other tests and measurements

 

The following tests and
measurements shall be conducted at proper time during the sea trial according
to the requirements of the Classification Society and the Rules, Regulations
and the Builder’s practice.

 

•    Electrical load measurement
(during mooring test).

•    Black-out test.

•    Fire detection and alarm test
(or during mooring test).

 

119512 Other tests and
measurements shall be carried out by Builder as per required by Class and
regulatory bodies.

 

•    Anchoring test.

•    Crash stop-astern-ahead test.

 

20

 

119513 Sea Trial for Subsequent Vessel

 

For subsequent vessel(s)
of this series, following listed tests shall be carried out as per the Class
rules. However the Buyer reserves the right to have the builder to carry out
additional assigned tests at the Buyer’s cost (refer to chapter 125).

 

•    Speed trial at the loading
condition and output of main engine as specified in the Building Contract for
the Guarantee service speed.

•    Anchoring test.

•    Steering gear test.

•    Four (4) hours endurance test
including two (2) hours fuel oil consumption test at CSR.

•    Crash stop astern and crash
stop ahead test.

•    Adjustment of magnetic compass.

•    Starting test.

•    Minimum revolution speed test.

 

119514 Overhauling Inspection after Sea Trial

 

After sea trial, working
parts of main engine and one generator engine shall be opened for the Buyer’s
inspection in accordance with the standard of the Builder approved by Buyer and
refitted to working condition, if necessary due to its performance during sea
trial. A confirmation dock run after overhauling for 1⁄2 hours at low load to be
carried out before delivery.

 

Above tests may be
cancelled with the agreement of the Buyer.

 

120 Vibration and Noise

 

1201 Vibration

 

Care shall be given to
provide adequate scantlings, continuity and end attachments of foundation
girders supporting the main machinery and thrust bearing.

 

The stern framing, rudder
trunk and the support of the stern tube shall be designed so as to provide an
efficient arrangement for minimizing the vibration.

 

Measurement of vibration
shall be carried out on the vessel’s hull, accommodation, engine room and local
element to confirm that undue vibrations do not occur. The measuring place and
standard to be comply with ISO 6954 “Guidelines for the overall evaluation of
vibration in merchant ships”.

 

Joint meeting to evaluate
the results of above analysis shall be held at the place and time agreed
between the Buyer and the Builder as necessary. If vibration level exceeds the
defined criteria, the Builder shall make necessary improvements to practical
extent so that the compliance is achieved and verified.

 

Local vibration of vessel
to be measured at mutual agreed positions during endurance test.

 

1202 Noise

 

Necessary sound
insulation and isolation shall be provided so as to keep noise levels with
reference to the values at normal sea going condition according to IMO
Resolution A468 (XII)

 

“Code on Noise Level on
Board Ships”.

 

21

 

The noise level
measurements shall be carried out by the Builder at the suitable points in
below space when the vessel is running ahead steadily at normal continuous
rating of main engine during sea trial under the following conditions:

 

Machinery unnecessary for
normal navigation shall be stopped.

Mechanical ventilation
and air-conditioning equipment shall be in normal operation.

 

All doors and windows of
room shall be closed.

No intermittent sound and
noise shall be included.

The measurement shall be
take at a height of 1.2 m to 1.6 m above deck in the centre of each room.

Mean value of graduations
on the meters shall be taken as the noise level.

 

121 Plans For Approval

 

Following listed plans in
duplicate hard copy shall be submitted to the Buyer for approval. All
drawings/documents will be send to the Buyer via mail.

 

The Buyer shall, within
ten (10) calendar days after receipt thereof, return to the Builder one copy of
such plans via mail or Fax with the Buyer’s approval or comments, if written
thereon. The Buyer may need more time to approve the drawings as per the mutual
agreement between the Buyer and the Builder.

 

In the event that the
Buyer shall fail to return the plans within the time limits as herein above
provided, such plans shall be deemed to have been approved or confirmed without
any comment.

 

During the construction
phase, the Builder may submit the plans of partial amendments or alterations of
approved plans to the Buyer’s Representative(s) resident in the shipyard for
approval, subject to the provisions of the Contract.

 

The Representative(s)
shall, within three (3) days after receipt there of, return one copy of those
plans with approval of comments, if any.

 

The Builder’s standard
plans and the manufacturers’ plans with or without modifications may be used as
plans for approval and also working plans.

 

The Builder will submit
approved for construction drawings in the list to the Buyer in hard copy..

 

The maker’s working
drawings, installation/commissioning instruction will be made available to the
Buyer’s Representative(s) during the outfitting period and prior to the
installation of the subjected equipment.

 

A. General

 

1. General Arrangement
Plan

2. Capacity Plan

3. Model Test Report

4. Propeller data with
drawing

5. Test procedure for sea
trials

6. Preliminary trim &
stability calculations

7. Tank test plan

8. Draft marks

9. Docking plan

10. Engine room
arrangement plan

 

22

 

11. Accommodation layout

12. Wheel house
arrangement

13. Engine control room
arrangement

14. Cargo control room
arrangement

15. Galley, pantry &
laundry room arrangement

16. CO2 room
arrangement

 

B. Steel Construction

 

1. Mid-ship Section with
transverse section

2. Profile & Decks
Plan

3. Longitudinal &
Transverse water tight Bulkheads

4. Stern construction

5. Shell expansion

7. Engine room construction

8. Bow construction

9. Deckhouse construction

10. Cargo tank
construction

 

C. Outfitting Plan

 

1. Main & auxiliary
engine foundation

2. Anchors and Chain
arrangement

2a. Hawse pipe
arrangement

3. Paint schedule

4. Insulation plan

5. Fire-fighting
equipment and extinguisher plan with local application water based system for
E/R

6. Fire & wash water
diagram

7. Navigation and signal
lights

8. Life saving appliances
plan with escape route

9. Bilge system and bilge
separator system diagram

10. Manhole Plan

11. Bottom plug arrangement

12. Inside and outside
stairs and ladder plan

13. Door plan

14. Windows and scuttles
plan

15. Mooring arrangement

16. Masts and lights

17. Rails and handrails
arrangement

18. Deck covering in
accommodation

19. Joiner bulkhead,
lining and ceiling plan

20. Bow thruster
arrangement

21. Zinc anodes
arrangement

22. Diagram of air conditioning
plant for accommodation

23. Diagram of natural
and mechanical ventilation system

24. Diagram of
ventilation system for engine room

25. Rudder arrangement

26. House handling and
ship service crane

27. Ship name & owner’s
insignia

 

23

 

D. Piping System

 

1. Vent & sounding
piping

2. Fuel oil filling and
transfer

3. Fuel oil purifying and
service

4. Ship service
compressed air

5. Engine room service
compressed air

6. Ballast system

7. Bilge system

8. Ship service fresh
water system

9. Engine room fresh
water system

10. Scuppers and sanitary
drain system

11. Forward and after
hydraulic oil system

12. Lubricating oil
filling, transfer and purifying system

13. Quick closing system

14. Sanitary water

15. Fire fighting system

16. Sewage treatment and
outboard discharge

 

E. Electric Part

 

1. Wiring diagram of
electric plant

2. Electric load balance

3. One-line power diagram
booklet

4. Main and emergency
electric switchboard

5. Diagram of light and
emergency light in Engine room

6. Shore power circuit

7. Inside and outside
light

8. Navigation and signal
light

9. General electric alarm
system

10. Call bells diagram

11. Automatic, sound power
& intrinsically safe telephones

12. Radio room,
navigation aids and miscellaneous diagram

13. Antennas and radar
arrangement

14. Automation diagram
for engine room

 

F. Cargo Handling System

 

1. Cargo piping diagram

2. Deck piping plan

3. Compressor room piping
plan

4. Sea water diagram

5. Safety air diagram

6. Dry air diagram

7. Gas detecting diagram

8. Tank cleaning system

9. Cargo heating system

 

122 Finished Plan and
Instruction Books

 

At the time of the Vessel’s
delivery, finished plans of only key plan both softcopy in CD ROM in pdf format
and hard blueprint shall be furnished to the Buyer in triplicate, one copy to
the Buyer’s site office and two (2) copies to the vessel, but the others
finished plan of blueprint to be furnished to the Buyer in triplicate.

 

24

 

The scope of supply of
the finished plans shall be in accordance with the Builder’s standard and the
list of the finished plans shall be submitted to the Buyer in due course for
approval.

 

The following plans, one
copy each, shall be provided in frames and placed on board the Vessel at such
locations as designated by the Buyer’s Representative(s):

 

•    General Arrangement (2 Sets)

•    Capacity Plan With Deadweight
Scale

•    Maneuvering characteristics

•    Fire Control & Safety plan
(2 Sets)

•    Cargo Piping Diagram

•    Ballast Piping Diagram

•    Single Line Electric Diagram

•    Bunkering Plan

 

Three copies of the
instruction books of the Vessel’s major machinery and equipment shall be
furnished, one set of the Buyer’s site office and two sets to the Vessel.

 

123 Name
Plates and Identification

 

Name plates for main engine, deck machinery, auxiliaries and electrical
equipment shall be described in English and in metric system.

Name plates of other installation shall be referred to respective
specifications.

Name plates on upper deck shall be of brass with engraved text in
English.

All name plates and caution plates shall be approved by the Buyer.

Name plates shall be screwed on, glue is not allowed for fixing name
plates.

Bound of tanks and every 10th frame should be marked with
welding beads.

 

124
Delivery

 

When completed, the
vessel shall be delivered to the Buyer in a seaworthy condition, safely
afloating at the Builder’s wharf under the requisite legal formalities.

 

Tanks, cargo holds,
bilges, accommodation and other spaces shall be free from tonnage and dirt,
completed in every respect and ready for service. Painted surfaces shall be
touched up and cleaned, machinery to be in running order, all electric lights
to be in good working order, outfits, spares and stores to be properly stowed,
and compass to be adjusted.

 

125
Exemption

 

For the second and
successive sister vessel, the submission of plans for the Buyer’s approval may
be exempted with in so far as there involves no alteration of the design. Also
the following tests may be exempted subject to approval of the Buyer,
Classification Society and other regulatory bodies.

 

(1) Inclining test
(deadweight measurement shall be carried out)

(2) Stopping inertia test

(3) Measurement of crash
stop test

(4) Turning test 360
degrees with the helm angles of 35 degrees port and starboard

(5) Model tank test.

 

25

 

(6) Noise & Vibration
Measurement (but spot / manual measurement shall be carried out)

 

126
Insurance

 

The Builder shall take
insurance as per the Building Contract.

 

127
Warranty

 

The Builder shall
undertake the warranty to guarantee the vessel for a minimum of one (1) year
against defects due to faulty materials, machinery, equipment and workmanship
after acceptance and delivery.

 

The warranty for ship’s
equipment will be reset for one year after the fix of each particular recurrent
defect, but not more than 18 months from the vessel’s delivery expired except
serious hull defects caused by Builder.

 

26

 

200 General Particulars \

 

201 Principle Dimensions
(to be decided at design stage)

 

	
  Length overall:

  	
   

  	
  approx.

  	
   

  	
  102.50 m

  	
   

  
	
  Length b.p.:

  	
   

  	
  approx.

  	
   

  	
  95.00 m

  	
   

  
	
  Breadth mld:

  	
   

  	
  approx.

  	
   

  	
  17.80 m

  	
   

  
	
  Depth mld:

  	
   

  	
  approx.

  	
   

  	
  8.80 m

  	
   

  
	
  Design Draft:

  	
   

  	
  approx.

  	
   

  	
  6.00 m

  	
   

  
	
  Scantlings
  Draft:

  	
   

  	
  approx.

  	
   

  	
  6.50 m

  	
   

  
	
  Complement:

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  18 persons

  	
   

  

 

202 Speed and Endurance

 

Trial speed at design
draft (6.00 meter.) at max. continuous
output of main engine (MCR), with clean bottom in calm and deep sea under
beaufort scale of 2 or around 12.3 knots. The final speed shall be subject to
the MODEL TEST REPORT.

 

Service speed at fully
loaded condition at design draft 6.00 m at 85% output of main engine (CSR) with
10% sea margin at 11.7 knots.

 

Endurance based on 98% of
Heavy Fuel Oil tank capacity and service speed of 11.7 knots will be minimum
5000 sea miles. The final endurance will be subject to the tank capacity plan.

 

Fuel
oil consumption per day will be determined later at 85% of maximum continuous
output for propulsion (the figure is based on a lower calorific value of at
least 42,700KJ/Kg and according to ISO 3046/1). Fuel rate for main engine at
MCR is with reference to main engine maker. Fuel rate for main engine at MCR
194 g/Kw h

 

203 Installed Power

 

	
  Main engine

  	
   

  	
  DAIHATSU 8DKM - 28

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Number of set

  	
   

  	
  1 set

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Max. continuous output (MCR)

  	
   

  	
  2500 KW

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Max. continuous revolutions at MCR

  	
   

  	
  750 rpm

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Continuous service Rating (CSR)

  	
   

  	
  2125 KW x 710.45 rpm

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Fuel Used

  	
   

  	
  380cst at 50°C

  

 

Propeller

 

	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  4 or 5 - Blades, fixed pitch type

  
	
  Number of set

  	
   

  	
  1 set

  
	
  Gearbox

  	
   

  	
  for details see item 9023

  

 

27

 

	
  Revolution of propeller

  	
   

  	
  200 rpm as per calculation

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Diameter of propeller

  	
   

  	
  About 3400 mm

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Material of propeller

  	
   

  	
  Ni-Al-Bronze

  

 

Main Generator Set

 

	
  No.of set & power

  	
   

  	
  3 sets x according to power balance

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Electric source

  	
   

  	
  calculation abt. 400 kw x 1800 rpm

  A.C. three phases, 450V, 60Hz.

  

 

Emergency Generator Set: Same as main generators

 

	
  No.of set & power

  	
   

  	
  1 set x 87 kw x 1800 rpm

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Electric source

  	
   

  	
  A.C. three phases, 450V, 60Hz.

  

 

204 Deadweight and
Capacity

 

The guaranteed deadweight
in sea water (specific gravity of 1.025) shall be 5500 metric tons at design
draught of 6.0 m. Deadweight at the scantling draft of 6.5 m is about 6200
metric tons (for reference
only).

 

Following
is the detail tank capacities of the vessel;

 

Cargo
tanks capacity (100% full) incl. slop tanks abt. 7000 m3

Slop
tank capacity (100% full) abt. 200 m3

Fuel
oil tanks capacity, incl. Service & settling tank abt. 200 m3

Fresh
water tanks capacity (98 % full) abt. 100
m3

Water
ballast tank incl. F.P.T. & A.P.T.
abt. 2000 m3

 

205 Cargo List

 

The
cargo list for bunkering oil shall include Heavy fuel oil, Fuel oil, Marine
diesel oil and black oil,  etc.
which can lawfully carry according to Class Notation, technical construction
and not harmful to vessel’s cargo system.

 

Mainly
the cargoes are listed as following:

 

•    Heavy fuel oil cargoes with specific gravity of 0.94 t/m3

•    Marine diesel oil

•    Marine gasoline oil

•    Black oil with specific gravity of 1.05 t/m3

 

28

 

206 Bow Thruster

 

The
vessel shall be equipped with a bow thruster at forward of ship to improve
maneuvering  performance.

 

Abt.
300 kw electric driven motor shall be installed. The motor shall be started
without causing black outs as per maker’s standard.

 

207 Deck Heights, Sheer
And Camber

 

2071
Height Between Decks At Centerline

 

	
  Item

  	
   

  	
  Metric

  
	
  From upper deck to poop deck

  	
   

  	
  2.80 m

  
	
  From poop deck to boat deck

  	
   

  	
  2.60 m

  
	
  From boat deck to captain deck

  	
   

  	
  2.60 m

  
	
  From captain deck to navigation bridge deck

  	
   

  	
  2.60 m

  
	
  From navigation bridge deck to compass deck

  	
   

  	
  2.60 m

  
	
  From upper deck to forecastle deck

  	
   

  	
  2.60 m

  

 

2072
Shear On Main Deck

 

Due to Camber

 

2073 Camber of Decks

 

	
  Main deck, straight camber

  	
   

  	
  abt. 0.350 m

  
	
  Forecastle deck, straight camber

  	
   

  	
  abt. 0.350 m

  
	
  Other decks

  	
   

  	
  0 m

  
	
  Platform decks in engine room

  	
   

  	
  0 m

  

 

208 Complement

 

	
  Rank

  	
   

  	
  Deck

  	
   

  	
  Engineer

  	
   

  	
  Other

  	
   

  	
  Sum

  
	
  Captain class

  	
   

  	
  1-Captain

  	
   

  	
  1-C/Engineer

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
  Officer

  	
   

  	
  1-C/Officer

  	
   

  	
  1-2/Engineer

  	
   

  	
  1-Pilot

  	
   

  	
  5

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  1-2/Officer

  	
   

  	
  1-3/Engineer 1

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Petty & Crew

  	
   

  	
  3

  	
   

  	
  4

  	
   

  	
  2-Cook

  	
   

  	
  9

  
	
  Spare

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
  Total

  	
   

  	
  7

  	
   

  	
  8

  	
   

  	
  3

  	
   

  	
  18

  

 

All
shall be according to agreed G.A. and Accommodation plan.

 

300 Hull Structure

 

301 General

 

The
ship is designed at a scantling draft of 6.5 m and shall be approved by the
Class. It is of all welded mild steel construction. The structure scantlings
shall be as per rule requirements of the Classification Society. The high
tensile steel shall be used as little as possible. In case high tensile steel
is used, the corrosion margin shall be 25% more.

 

29

 

Structure work shall be executed in accordance with the Builder’s
standard practice with reference to Chinese Shipbuilding Standard which is
approved by the Classification Society.

 

Welding shall be
performed by manual, gravity, electro slag, CO2 and automatic welding.
Continuous welds to be applied in all tanks, wet spaces and external areas.

 

The combined framing
system is used for the hull structure. The main hull structure is designed and
checked against the class rules for carrying product oil. Cargo oil tanks are suitable for fully loading cargoes
with specific gravity up to 1.05. The structure scantlings are suitable for any
level of filling, including alternative loading. The sloshing effects are to be
considered for deck structure, bulkhead structure during partial loading
condition.

 

One (1) central
longitudinal continuous oil – tight vertically corrugated bulkhead and five (5)
transverse oil – light vertically corrugated bulkheads are allocated in the
cargo oil hold region. Two transverse bulkheads at the both end of cargo area
shall be flat bulkhead with vertical stiffeners face outside of cargo area.
There will be no frames stiffeners what so ever inside the cargo tanks.

 

Main hull structure shall
be designed and calculated in accordance with the requirements for oil tanker.
The hull structure to be designed to fully load liquids with specific gravity
up to 1.05 in cargo tanks/slop tanks with adjacent tanks to be empty, including
slack tank conditions.

 

Longitudinal strength
including bending moment and shear force at specified bulkheads for all loading
conditions will be calculated.

 

The scantling of all
structural members shall comply with the rules of classification society unless
specify here after.

 

Before assembly, all
steel plates with thickness 6 mm or more that are to be painted later shall be
shot – blasted according to Swedish Standard Sa 2.5 and painted with 15 micron
zinc silicate primer (the detail refer to section 4021).

 

Insert plates shall be
used instead of doublers as much as possible.

 

302 Material and Welding

 

All mild steel higher
grade steel, forgings, castings and anti-magnetic material manufactured in the
hull structure and deckhouse shall meet the quality as per required by
classification society.

 

Steel material not
specified by the Classification Society shall be in compliance with Chinese
Industrial Standard according to the Builder’s practice.

 

In way of compass zone,
non–magnetic steel plates and sections shall be used as per requirement of
rules.

 

Steel plates shall be
free from lamination and segregation. Visible steel plates at outer shell
plating above and below waterline shall be smooth without defects and repairs.

 

Castings and forgings
below waterline, such as shaft struts, bossing, rudder horn and stock shall be
delivered with first class surfaces without pins or blow holes. Sand and slag
enclosures shall be avoided. Gas cutting notches shall be smoothly rounded and
uneven spots shall be smoothed by grinding.

 

Welding procedure
including edge preparation shall be executed in accordance with the Builder’s

 

30

 

established modern
welding procedure and practice with reference to Chinese Shipbuilding Standard
and approved by the Classification Society.

 

Automatic welding shall
be used to the greatest extent. The welders engaged in the welding shall be
fully qualified and holding welding certificates from the Classification
Society for the type of welding carried out.

 

Electrodes and other
welding materials have to be properly selected for the special intended
purposes.

 

All welding shall be
continuous except in dry spaces in the superstructure and deckhouse where
intermittent welding is permitted.

 

Care shall be taken to
avoid stress concentration due to welding, heating and discontinuity of the
structure or build – in stress.

 

In order to ascertain the
soundness of welding suitable number of X-rays photograph to be taken for the
important members according to the Rules’ requirements. The plan of the X-ray
shall be submitted to the Buyer for approval and the X-ray photograph and
report shall be submitted to the Buyer for checking.

 

303 Main Hull

 

The ship shall be
designed as double hull construction. Double skin and double bottom shall be
provided as per Rule’s requirements.

 

The minimum width of wing
tanks shall be 1.0 m and the height of double bottom shall be 1.10 m as per
MARPOL requirements for Product Oil Tanker.

 

The scantling,
construction and materials of hull within a range of midship part shall be as
shown on Midship Section Plan.

 

In designing,
longitudinal strength to be checked to all loading conditions required by the
Rules. It is to supply the calculation of main structure, midship section,
construction plans (incl. profile, decks, bottom etc.) at the technical
designed stage.

 

Double bottom to be
located in cargo oil tanks region, pump room and engine room.

 

The bottom plate and
inner bottom plates in cargo oil tanks region shall be stiffened by
longitudinals, and those in engine room shall be stiffened by floors. The inner
bottom plating in cargo tanks shall be sloped towards cargo pump suction well
(near centerline of vessel). The suction well structure for cargo pump to be
designed by the cargo pump Manufacturer and to be approved by the Buyer.

 

The suction well must
have round corners of reinforced design.

 

The bottom plate at the
forward shall be strengthened in accordance with the Rules.

 

One tier non-watertight
platform deck shall be arranged in engine room.

 

Shell framing in engine
room to be adopted transverse framing type and the web frame to be fitted.
Pillars shall be fitted in suitable frame and to be connected with the floors
and transverses. Doublers shall be fitted at the both ends of the pillars
(detail refers to section 310).

 

The fore and aft peak
tanks can be used as water ballast tanks and shall be built with transverse

 

31

 

framing system.

 

The shell plating in way
of hawse and one plate below shall be strengthened with thicker plate. Stem
frame shall be of fair formed steel plate construction, well raked forward with
round and to be of welded construction.

 

Openings of shell such as
sea chest shall be in accordance with the Rules.

 

The thickness of upper
deck within 0.4L amidships to be met the requirements of longitudinal strength.

 

The transverse bulkheads
and centre longitudinal bulkhead in cargo oil tank area shall be of vertical
corrugated type bulkheads. However the transverse bulkhead for both end of
cargo area shall be flat type bulkhead with stiffening facing outside of cargo
tank. Side longitudinal bulkheads formed wing tanks in cargo space shall be
flat type bulkhead with stiffening facing outside of cargo tank as well. The
longitudinal bulkheads of double hull construction shall be designed with longitudinal
framing in wing tanks. NO frames, stiffeners what so ever are allowed inside
the cargo tanks.

 

304 Stem and Stern

 

The stem together with
bulbous bow shall be of fabricated welded steel plate constructions to the
shell lines, and welded to the shell and keel plates.

 

Stern frame is to be of
fabricated welded with steel plates. Weldable steel castings may be used for
the bulbous stern.

 

Low hydrogen electrode
shall be used for welding thick steel plate to casting.

 

305 Keel Plate

 

The plate keel shall be
connected firmly with stern and stern frame.

 

306 Shell Plating

 

Stringer plates and sheer
strake are to be connected welded “T” type corner fillet.

 

Section plan welding
quality and inspection are to be in accordance with the requirements of the Rules.

 

Extra thickness and
stiffeners undersides are to be provided by inserted thicker plates in way of
run of anchor, anchor housing, around sea chest openings. Openings in shell
plating to be well rounded and reinforced by inserted thicker plates.

 

The thickness of the
shell plates shall be reduced gradually from midship to fore and aft end in
accordance with the requirement of the Rules.

 

The lifting rings to be
provided for propeller and rudder installation.

 

32

 

307 Bottom Structure

 

Longitudinal framing
system are to be provided for hull bottom construction in cargo tank, and
transverse framing system for engine room space and fore and aft peak tanks.

 

Attention shall be paid
to the members for the transition region of the longitudinal and transverse
framings.

 

In double bottoms, solid
floors to be fitted for suitable frame spaces, and watertight floors to be
fitted at watertight bulkheads. Bottom and inner bottom longitudinals as well
as side girders shall be fitted.

 

Solid floors shall be
fitted at every frame in fore peak and aft peak. Suitable drain holes to be
arranged in double bottom tanks so as to be able to discharge/drain easily.

 

308 Slide Shell Structure

 

The upper part of slide
shell structure to be of longitudinal framing system. Web frame shall be fitted
in association with solid floors.

 

309 Decks

 

Upper deck shall be
strength deck, longitudinal framing system shall be adopted.

 

Sufficient drainage of
the upper deck shall be arranged.

 

Web beams shall be fitted
in line with web frames.

 

The camber of upper deck
shall be straight.

 

Structure shall be
suitably strengthened under cranes, etc.

 

Deck plating under all
machinery such as cranes, windlass, and mooring winches should have increased
plating thickness.

 

Platform deck to be
provided in engine room, platform for the generators shall be reinforced
necessarily.

 

310 Pillars

 

Pillars shall be provided
where necessary in engine room in association with web trams and web beams.

 

Adequate number of
pillars shall be provided under the superstructure decks or deck house walls
under concentrated loadings.

 

Doublers shall be fitted
at the both ends of all pillars.

 

33

 

311 Bulkhead

 

Watertight transverse bulkheads
shall be extended to the upper deck as shown on the General Arrangement Plan.

 

The transverse bulkheads
between cargo tanks shall be of vertical corrugated type without upper and
lower stool. The longitudinal bulkheads in cargo tanks shall be of vertical
corrugated type without upper and lower stool. Zig Zag Loading Condition to be
calculated for strength calculation for class approval.

 

Outside boundary walls
for the superstructure to be plane with vertical stiffeners. The reasonable
arrangement for steel walls in the deck houses to be provided so as to reduce
the vibrations to the least.

 

Boundary steel walls to
be built for the carpenter’s work room, stores, control rooms and other
necessary space.

 

312 Peak Tanks

 

Fore and aft peak tanks
to be reinforced with side transverses, side stringers or non-watertight
opening platform and to be used for water ballast tanks.

 

Fore peak and fore area
shall be reinforced for panting and slumming.

 

313 Superstructure and
Deck House

 

Four tiers of superstructure
shall be arranged on the after of main deck as per General Arrangement Plan.

 

Superstructure and deck
house are of welded steel construction. In general, the plates thickness shall
not be less than following table:

 

	
  Exposed deck:

  	
   

  	
  As per class regulations, but not less than 8mm

  
	
  External walls:

  	
   

  	
  7 mm

  
	
  Other area:

  	
   

  	
  6 mm

  

 

The superstructure and
deck house are steel flat plates watertight construction with vertical
stiffeners.

 

Forecastle and poop deck
shall be of transverse framing system in connection with strong beams, girders
and pillars. Deck house shall be of welded plating stiffened with beam and
girder.

 

A flat plate with
stiffeners shall be applied for the accommodation front wall and accommodation
house walls. All accommodation block plate stiffeners and fitted internally.

 

Decks in superstructure
and deck house shall be transversely longitudinally stiffened with beams,
girders. Continuous welding is employed at all wet spaces.

 

Wheelhouse front wall
shall extend outwards and be inclined outwards from the navigation bridge deck
as shown on the General Arrangement Plan.

 

34

 

314 Rudder

 

Rudder shall be designed,
according to the speed at maximum continuous rating with fully loaded
condition. The working angle shall be 35 degrees from the rudder’s center
vertical plane as per maker’s recommendation. Rudder shall have necessary area
to keep reasonable course stability and steering performance in accordance with
good maneuverability.

 

One set of streamlined
rudder shall be installed in line with the propeller according to the maker
instruction.

 

Two stainless steel (AISI
316L) plugs for filling and draining shall be fitted at the top and bottom of
the rudders.

 

Water tightness shall be
tested in accordance with the requirements of the classification society.

 

The lifting hole shall be
provided on rudder which is able to be kept closing by welded plate.

 

Welded jumping stopper
shall be fitted to prevent the rudder from undue lifting and accidental up
shipping.

 

Bottom clearance of the
rudder and propeller shall be of minimum 200 mm above the baseline.

 

The lower (wet bearing)
of the rudder stock shall be made of ORKOT or RALCO bearing (artificial
material).

 

All above rudder
construction in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and the lifting
rings shall be provided for easy installation. Removal of rudder shall be
possible without dismantling of rudder carrier.

 

315 Miscellaneous

 

3151 Foundations

 

Foundations for main
engine are constructed as part of double bottom construction in engine room.
The soft support may be used to reduce the vibration and noise in engine room.

 

The auxiliary engine and
generator shall be provided with a common bed-frame foundations. The auxiliary
engines may be flexible mounted on there foundations as per the supplement from
the maker.

 

The foundations for deck
machinery and other equipment etc. shall be provided, where necessary.

 

The foundation shall be
able to access for cleaning and drainage.

 

Deck machinery and
equipment such as windlass, steering gear, pumps, motors, HVAC unit and etc.
are generally provided with integral foundation of steel welded construction
with reinforcement underneath if necessary. The foundation shall be of proper
height which enable easy maintaining.

 

3152 Bulwark and Hand
Rails

 

Steel bulwark is provided
in way of fore end of forecastle. The bulwark plate thickness shall be
increased in way of openings for fairleads, mooring chocks and etc.

 

35

 

Both sides of interior stairways shall be fitted with stainless steel
pipe hand rails. Galvanized steel pipe handrails are fitted for accommodation
deck, main deck, catwalk and sidewalk as shown on General Arrangement Plan.

 

Storm handrails shall be
fitted on exterior bulkheads of all superstructure and deck houses surrounded
by free decks. Protective rails, screens or guards shall be fitted. All
handrails are installed at height of 1050 mm.

 

3153 Catwalk

 

A passage bridge catwalk
is installed to connect after superstructure with forcastle deck. The
galvanized steel grating will be used for catwalk floors. Galvanized steel pipe
handrails shall be fitted on the catwalk.

 

3154 Bilge Keel

 

Bilge keel with a length
of approximately 30 percent of the vessel’s length to be arranged. At the each
side of the vessel the bilge keel shall be fairly tapered with toe plates.

 

3155 Chain Locker

 

Two self stowing chain
lockers are installed as shown on General Arrangement Plan. Chain lockers are
square type of all-welded watertight construction. All stiffeners of chain
lockers are arranged on the outside of the lockers.

 

Suitable foot holes are
provided through the main deck level to the bottom and a watertight access
manhole shall be fitted. Access manholes are arranged on the chain lockers wall
in bosun store for the inspection of lockers and chains.

 

Perforated steel gratings
are laid above the bottom and adequately supported to bear the weight of
chains. The bottom of the chain lock shall fit with a doubler or thicker insert
plate.

 

3156 Hawse Pipes

 

The hawse pipes are built
with separate pipes of welded steel. The hawse pipes are arranged to allow easy
dropping of the anchors clear of stem and supported substantially by deck,
shell and web frames with enough brackets, ribs and etc.

 

The hawse pipes have cast
steel bolster fitted on the shell plate. The position and size of bolster shall
be designed so as the minimum clearance between bow and anchor flukes at in
board condition is 500 mm.

 

Three washing pipes are
provided in each hawse pipe for chain cleaning. The washing pipes shall be
connected with fire fighting system. Chain – wash device shall be controlled by
means of valve close to the anchor winch.

 

3157 Sea Chests

 

Sea chests shall be
installed. Chest openings have proper shape so as to avoid reinforcement of
shell plates such as fitting doublers or inserted thicker plates.

 

Sufficient aluminum
anodes shall be installed in sea chests as per requirements of Class.

 

36

 

3158 Bottom Plug

 

Double bottom ballast
tanks shall be provided with two bottom plugs.

 

Other tanks and cofferdam
connected to the Vessel’s bottom shall be fitted with one bottom plug which
shall be allocated away from keel plate as far as practicable.

 

The bottom plugs shall be
of stainless steel (AISI 316L).

 

No bottom plugs shall be
installed in fuel oil and fresh water tanks

 

3159 Funnel

 

A shaped funnel as shown
in figure 1 shall be welded construction with vertical stiffeners and
horizontal stringers, and with closed top plate, adequate number of eye plate,
and a steel door on it. Drain pipe from top plates to the scupper system shall
be fitted. A vertical ladder shall be fitted externally after of the funnel.

 

Funnel structure shall be
strengthened at supports for exhaust pipes etc. Eyes or rail for painting stage
shall be provided outside.

 

37

 

400 Paint and Corrosion
Control

 

401 General

 

All painting works
including surface preparation and painting inspection shall be carried out
according to ISO 8501 standard, the paint maker’s guidelines and Builder’s
practice/standard as well as this specification.

 

The painting/coating
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

 

Paint shall be applied by
airless spray in general. Where the spray is difficult to apply, brush or
rollers may be used. All in accordance of the makers instructions for Guarantee
of three (3) years.

 

No paint shall be applied
to the following surfaces:

 

100          Copper,
brass, bronze, aluminum, aluminum alloy and other non-corrosive metals except
specifically mentioned in this specification.

 

101          Wooden
work in stores.

 

102          Galvanized
fittings in hidden spaces and in tanks except cargo oil tanks.

 

103          Inner
surfaces of doubler and steel surface enclosed tightly.

 

104          Internal
steel decks covered with deck covering.

 

If necessary the damaged
parts of galvanized surface shall be pickled SIS ST3 grade touched up with one
coat of zinc rich paint or equivalent (immersion part: touch up with finish
paint same as surround area).

 

Walkway, vertical ladder,
U-bolt/nut and others

 

Outside: Galvanized and
touch up with finish paint as surround area

 

All galvanized parts
above upper deck shall be coated with the finished paint

 

Final color shall be
approved by Buyer. However the colors of each coat other than the final one
shall be in accordance with the paint maker’s guideline which will take
consideration of the final finish color. Each coat shall have different colour.
Pipes shall be coloured as per ISO colour code.

 

Ballast take and Cargo
oil tanks’ coating procedure after completion of hot works and tank testing
shall be carried out in accordance with the Builder’s practice and he mutually
agreed by Builder, Paint Manufacturer and Buyer.

 

The under water survey
shall be carried out before delivery if dry docking is not carried.

 

402 Surface Preparation

 

4021 Primary Preparation

 

All steel plates and
section shall be shot blasted to SIS Sa 2.5 and immediately primed with one
cost of inorganic zinc silicate shop prime applied to dry film thickness of 15
microns which will be suitable for next coating scheme. The inorganic zinc
silicate shop primer has to be approved by Class and coating manufactory

 

38

 

The thin plate with
thickness under 6 mm and profile with length under 3 m shall be de-rusted to
SIS ST3.

 

All sharp edges of cut or
burnt steel shall be ground smooth with abt. 2 mm radius with +/-1 mm
tolerance. Irregular leads of welding shall be ground smooth before application
of paint. Surface damages such as pitting, undercut and etc., shall be welded
up and ground smooth before application of paint. Welding sputters shall be
removed.

 

The painting of the
exposed surfaces such as outside shell, superstructure, deck house, funnel and
living space shall be free from sag and run.

 

After the specified
costing is applied, the paint film for the damaged parts shall be prepared at
proper time. When such damage comes to the surface of steel and rust occurs,
the surface shall be cleaned to secondary surface preparation grade and coated
as originally specified.

 

When such damage does not
reach to the steel surface, the surface can be touched up to the specified film
thickness.

 

4022 Galvanizing

 

Galvanizing can be done
by hot dip method according to normal practice.

 

Damaged area of
galvanizing part shall be touched up by one coat with zinc rich epoxy.

 

4023 Secondary
Preparation

 

Before the first coat is
applied, the damages on shop primer by welding, burning, rubbing etc., and the
rusted steel surface shall be prepared in accordance with following sequence,

 

	
  a.

  	
   

  	
  Block building.

  
	
  b.

  	
   

  	
  Preparation for Class/Buyer inspection.

  
	
  c.

  	
   

  	
  Power tool cleaning repair as per S13 and grinding
  the sharp corner

  
	
  d.

  	
   

  	
  Air blow.

  
	
  e.

  	
   

  	
  Shop primer stripe coats(two coats).

  
	
  f.

  	
   

  	
  Block erection.

  
	
  g.

  	
   

  	
  Power tooling of erection joints as per ST3.

  
	
  h.

  	
   

  	
  Air blow.

  
	
  i.

  	
   

  	
  Shop primer stripe coats(two coats).

  
	
  j.

  	
   

  	
  Coat as per the paint schedule.

  

 

Repair as mentioned above
means repairing of blow holes, undercuts, welding sputters and etc... according
to the Class/Buyer’s recommendation.

 

Cargo oil tanks, slop
tanks and fresh water tanks shall be blasted to Sa 2.5.

 

403 Shop Primer

 

The shop primer serves to
protect the steel from corrosion during construction before application of the
hull paint scheme.

 

Shop primer must be
acceptable for the follow up paint system.

 

39

 

404 Paint Works

 

Minimum over coating time
of painting application shall reference to Manufacturer’s guideline.

 

Welding slag, weld
splatter, gas cutting edge shall be removed/ground smooth prior to paint
application.

 

Watertight weld lines via
manual welding shall be painted after the air test.

 

Non-watertight weld lines
and fillet welding for stiffening member shall be painted after block
inspection.

 

Any structure/spots
except above to be painted before inspection shall have consent from
classification society and Buyer.

 

All machineries and
electric equipments shall be coated in accordance with maker’s standard. The
damaged part shall only be touched up in accordance with Builder’s practice
with two (2) coats of finish coat of compatible type.

 

Prior painting, the
surface shall be cleaned of oil, moisture, dust, zinc, salt and other foreign
material with thinner, fresh water, wire brush and etc..

 

405 Film Thickness

 

The dry film thickness
specified in the painting scheme shall be met for at least 85% of the total
area and under thickness/over thickness shall be observed.

 

The dry film thickness
specified in the painting schedule to be attained on at least 85% of the
measuring points and at least 85% thickness of specified one to be attained on
remaining 15% measuring points except plate edges, etc.

 

406 Measuring

 

Measurement of dry film
may be done with proper film gauge such as MICRO tester or ELCO meter. The
measurement shall be carried out in accordance with paint maker’s
recommendation. The records shall be submitted to Buyer.

 

407 Inspection

 

The surface preparation
and checking of paint dry film thickness shall be carried out by the Builder in
the presence of Buyer’s representative and paint Manufacturer.

 

Record of temperature and
humidity shall be maintained during the painting work.

 

408 General Cautions

 

Mixing and thinning of
paint material, conditions/methods of application and timer interval between
each coat shall comply with the paint Manufacturer’s guideline. The paint shall
not be applied during the period of rain, snow, fog or mist and not be applied
when the weather condition may cause condensation such as relative humidity
above 85% and steel temperature lower than 3oC above the dew point. Further
more, during cargo oil tank coating, the humidity level shall be maintained
relatively as per makers specification.

 

40

 

409 Paint Schedule

 

4091 Ballast Tanks
Coating

 

Ballast tanks shall be
coated as epoxy light color paint layers. Black paint layers are not allowed.
Fresh Water tanks shall be coated as epoxy light color paint layers according
maker’s instruction.

 

4092 Cargo Oil Tanks
Coating

 

Cargo oil tanks shall
have surround coating which is listed in the maker list. The coat shall comply
with attached cargo list as 205. Supervision of the application shall be
executed carefully. The Buyer shall procure the guarantee from the paint maker
along with insurance.

 

4093 Decks
Superstructures and Other Places Coating.

 

Epoxy system shall be
used as per following specification.

 

4094 Painting Scheme

 

Painting scheme shall
follow the below specification.

 

Painting scheme for the
parts and spaces which are not specified herein shall be similar to surrounding
space or comparable spaces.

 

The finished paint for
weather part shall be applied by semi gloss or matt material.

 

All paint thickness
specified are dry film thickness. The paint scheme shall be refer to the
following table. The final configuration shall be as per the paint maker’s
recommendation.

 

	
  Area

  	
   

  	
  Total Film

  Thickness

  (microns)

  	
   

  	
  Type of Paint

  	
   

  	
  Film Thickness

  (micron)

  	
   

  
	
  Bottom & Vertical Bottom Up to

  Deepest Waterline

  	
   

  	
  550

  	
   

  	
  Tar Epoxy

  Vinyl Modified Epoxy

  Self Polish A/P Coat

  	
   

  	
  1 x 100

  1 x 150

  3 x 100

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Topside

  	
   

  	
  300

  	
   

  	
  Universal primer

  Epoxy

  Polyurethane

  	
   

  	
  1 x 100

  1 x 100

  2 x 50

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Exposed deck,
  cranes, deck

  machinery, etc.

  	
   

  	
  300

  	
   

  	
  Universal Primer

  Epoxy

  Polyurethane

  	
   

  	
  1 x 100

  1 x 100

  2 x 50

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  External superstructure

  Mast, davits, decks Deck Deck

  houses

  	
   

  	
  300

  	
   

  	
  Universal Primer

  Epoxy

  Polyurethane

  	
   

  	
  1 x 100

  1 x 100

  2 x 50

  	
   

  

 

41

 

	
  Area

  	
   

  	
  Total Film

  Thickness

  (microns)

  	
   

  	
  Type of Paint

  	
   

  	
  Film Thickness

  (micron)

  	
   

  
	
  Cargo/Slop tanks

  	
   

  	
  300

  	
   

  	
  Epoxy Series Similar to
  Interline 904 and guaranteed in accordance with the maximum period provided
  by the makers

  	
   

  	
  3 x 100 as per

  maker’s

  instruction

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Water ballast tanks, Fore peak tanks, After peak tanks, Cofferdams,
  Bow thruster space, Chain lockers, all bilges and void spaces.

  	
   

  	
  400

  	
   

  	
  Modified Epoxy

  Stripe Coat

  	
   

  	
  2 x 200

  2

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Fresh water tanks

  	
   

  	
  300

  	
   

  	
  High Quality Pure Epoxy

  	
   

  	
  3 x 100

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Fuel oil/Lub. oil tanks

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  No painting Rust inhibitive oil

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Interior deck part, Engine-room stores etc.

  	
   

  	
  200

  	
   

  	
  Alkyd primer

  Alkyd deck paint

  	
   

  	
  2 x 50

  2 x 50

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Engine room

  	
   

  	
  200

  	
   

  	
  Primer Alkyd

  Enamel Alkyd

  	
   

  	
  2 x 75

  1 x 50

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Interior walls behind insulation and paneling

  	
   

  	
  75

  	
   

  	
  Epoxy Primer

  	
   

  	
  1 x 75

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Rudder inner

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Intertuf 16 JB
  A016

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Rudder trunk

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Intertuf 606 JX A06/JX A010

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Rudder outside

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  As per bottom
  scheme

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Other area

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Conventional
  paint

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  

 

410 Cathodic Protection

 

Cathodic protection for
the underwater hull, ballast tanks, sea chests, rudder, propeller boss and
bilge keels shall be provided with aluminum anodes. Sufficient amount of anodes
shall be arranged to maintain an average current density at 5 mg/m3.

 

Anodes shall be
certificated as non – sparking. Anodes plan shall be submitted for Buyer’s
approval. The anodes shall be placed so that they can not be easily damaged
during vessel’s mooring and maneuver.

 

The anodes shall be
fitted on the hull via bolt. Life expectancy of anodes shall be three years for

 

42

 

hull and five years for
water ballast tanks based on 50% of the time in ballasting condition.

 

The dimension and
arrangement of the aluminum anodes shall be proposed by the manufacturer and
approved by the Buyer.

 

43

 

500 Accommodation

 

501 General

 

Accommodation shall be
arranged for 18 crews as shown on the General Arrangement Plan. The
construction shall be in accordance with SOLAS 1974 and latest amendments. The
accommodation shall be of European Standard with individual cabin, shower and
private toilet. The clear height in cabins shall be 2.1 m minimum. (ILO
regulation shall be applied)

 

The cabins shall be
arranged as shown on the General Arrangement Plan.

 

Public rooms and duty
rooms to be provided as following

 

	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Mess rooms for Officers & crews

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Conference room with pantry

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Ship’s office combined with cargo control room

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Deck changing room

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Engineer changing room

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Engine control room in engine room

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Wheel house combined with chart space and radio
  space

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Galley with pantry

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Refrigerating provision store

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Ship’s laundry

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Drying room

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Hospital

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Smoking room

  

 

The accommodation plan
shall be approved by the Buyer prior the construction.

 

502 Deck Covering

 

Deck covering should be fitting
according to according to Class rules.

 

	
  All Living Spaces,
  public area, officers except wheelhouse, captain room and chief engineer room

  	
   

  	
  Vinyl sheet 3mm thick
  on deck covering

  

 

44

 

	
  Wheelhouse interior,
  Captain

  room and chief engineer room

  	
   

  	
  Vinyl sheet 3 mm thick
  on deck covering.

  

  No finish coating of composition nor vinyl sheet shall be provide in enclosed
  spaces under built-in furniture but underlay shall be provided.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Washroom, galley &

  laundry, unit toilet

  	
   

  	
  150mm x 150mm non-slip
  quarry tiles on

  50mm cement underlay.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Wheelhouse interior,
  Engine control

  room, Emergency Gen. Room

  	
   

  	
  Non-skid rubber mat to
  be provided between doors and

  in front of consoles.

  

 

Non skid type Rubber mat
in wheel house

 

All wash places and
showers shall be similarly laid with ceramic tiles.

All exposed steel decks
shall be finished with deck paint.

Anti slip paint on
working places.

 

503 Insulation and Fire
Protection

 

All insulation and fire
protection shall be fitted according to Class rules. The insulation for fire
protection shall be constructed in accordance with the SOLAS 1974. Includes the
protocol of 1978 and its amendment of 1981 and 1983 and the latest updated
rules and regulations and associated amendments till the date the contracts are
signed.

 

Sound insulation shall be
provided for accommodation quarters, where necessary.

 

Exterior boundaries of
the poop and deckhouses in the vessel are to be insulated to ‘A-60’ class for
the whole of the portions which face cargo oil tanks and 3m aft of the front
boundary.

 

It is to be insulated to
‘A-60’ class with ‘A-60’ class deck covering for upper deck of top upper deck
of engine room within superstructure and top of other machinery spaces except
minor fire risk spaces with the consent of the Register to apply only steel
plate.

 

Deck under wheelhouse,
chartroom, radio room etc. to be insulated to ‘A-60’ class with ‘A-60’ class
deck covering.

 

Enclosed walls of
multi-ply engine casing bounding living quarters are to be insulated to ‘A-60’
class. Except casing bounding other machinery spaces having ‘A-0’ class
insulation and casing bounding exposed to the
weather, it may be only steel wall.

 

Walls dividing stairway
and passageway from engine casing and other space of greater fire risk are to
be insulated to ‘A-60’ class.

 

45

 

Thermal insulation shall
be provided as follows:

 

	
  Application

  	
   

  	
  Material

  	
   

  	
  Remarks

  
	
  Corridor bulkhead

  	
   

  	
  50 mm thick rock wool board and 0.5 mm thick galvanized
  steel sheets with decorative PVC film on both sides.

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Division bulkhead

  	
   

  	
  Ditto

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Lining

  	
   

  	
  25 mm thick rock wool board and 0.5 mm thick
  galvanized steel sheets with decorative PVC film on visible side

  	
   

  	
  25 mm thick rock wool board and 0.5 mm thick
  stainless steel sheets on visible side for galley and pantry.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Ceiling

  	
   

  	
  25 mm thick rock wool board and 0.5 mm thick steel
  sheets with PVC film.

  	
   

  	
  Ditto

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Thermal insulation

  	
   

  	
  50 mm thick glass wool (100 kg/m3 density)

  	
   

  	
  Exposed surface of accommodation.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Sound insulation

  	
   

  	
  75 mm thick glass wool (40 kg/ m3 density)

  	
   

  	
  Where required space

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Fire insulation

  	
   

  	
  20+20 mm thick
  ceramic wool (170 kg/ m3 density)

  	
   

  	
  As per Rules and Regulations

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Furniture

  	
   

  	
  Wooden furniture

  	
   

  	
   

  

 

All materials shall be
class approved and appropriately fire rated in accordance with SOLAS
requirements.

 

All insulations for
rooms/stores and etc... where crews may access, are visible and not behind lining
shall be finished by galvanized steel plate.

 

504 Cabin Furnishing and
Fittings

 

All furniture shall be
made of wood except steel desk in work shop and etc.... All tables and desks
shall be covered with plastic material.

 

5041 Captain and Chief
Engineer Class for bed room and day room

 

•    One(1) Single tier varnished
plywood bunk with drawer and bunk light. Approximate dimensions 2000mm x 1500mm
x 150mm with foam mattress.

 

46

 

•    One(1) wardrobe
with long mirror

•    Two(2) coat and hat hook

•    One(1) sofa

•    One(1) sideboard combined with
book case

•    One(1) coffee table

•    One(1) small steel safe
(Master’s only)

•    One(1) writing desk with drawers (double
pedestal type)

•    One(1) arm chair

•    One(1) quartz clock

•    Two(2) spare power slots

 

Curtains shall be
provided for windows.

 

5042 senior crew cabin
(chief officer class)

 

•    One(1) sofa

•    One(1) coffee table

•    One(l) book case

•    One(1) writing desk with
drawers

•    One(1) upholstered chair

•    One(l) filing cabinet

•    Two(2) coat and hat hook

•    One(1) single varnished plywood
bunk complete with light and foam mattress approximate dimension of 2000mm x
1000mm x 150mm.

•    One(1) wardrobe

•    Two(2) spare power slots

 

5043 One Man Cabins

 

•    One(1) single sofa

•    One(1) book case

•    One(1) writing desk with
drawers

•    One(l) upholstered chair

•    Two(2) coat and hat hook

•    One(1) single varnished
plywood bunk complete with light and foam mattress approximate dimension of
2000mm x 1000mm x 150mm.

•    One(1) wardrobe

•    Two(2) spare power slots

•    bed stand

 

Where the sidelights or
window exist, curtains will be provided.

All in accordance with
G.A. and accommodation plan.

Where the side light or
window exists, curtains will be fitted. The curtain shall be of blind type.

 

47

 

5044 Wash Place Fittings

 

	
  Private toilet

  	
   

  	
  Prefabricated unit, including Shower, Wash basin, Toilet cabinet, Soap dish, Water
  closet, Paper holder, Towel rack, Hand grip, Coat Hook and etc.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Public toilet

  	
   

  	
  unit toilet

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Fresh water

  	
   

  	
  Hydrophore system with a sterilizer, (fresh washing,
  shower, WC)

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Hot water

  	
   

  	
  Continuous circulating system with a calorifier

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Sanitary supply line

  	
   

  	
  Copper pipe

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Sanitary drain line

  	
   

  	
  Copper pipe

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Sewage drain method

  	
   

  	
  Sewage treatment system to be provided.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Sewage drain method

  	
   

  	
  Gravity toilet system

  

 

5045 Laundry Equipment

 

2 - 6 kg washing machine for cleaning clothes,
motor driven with integral spin dryer and 1 tumble dryer.

1 - 6 kg washing machine for dirty clothes

2 - Dryer

1 - Rinsing tub

2 - Ironing table

1 - Wooden rack

1 -
Heating radiator (Drying room). (Black heat type electrical radiator, l - 2 kw
with high temperature cut out thermostat)

2 - Electric irons

 

5046 Galley

 

1 - Electric range 4 hot
plates, comes with stainless steel exhaust canopy and fan over.

1 - Baking oven with 2
ovens

1 - Soup boiler incline
type, 20 litres

1 - Dressing table with
under locker

1 - Cooking table with
under shelf

1 - Wooden chopping block

1 - Marine microwave oven

1 - Food disposal unit

1 - Elect. refrigerator,
300 litres

1 - Elect. universal
machine

1 - Dish, pan and glass
rack

1 - Stainless double wash
bowl with cold & hot water

1 - Dish washer machine

 

48

 

1 - Coffee machine

1 - Frying pan

1 - Separated hand wash
basin

 

5047 Wheel House

 

The wheelhouse is to be
located on bridge deck as shown in the General Arrangement Plan and to be
fitted out with navigation, communication and control equipment.

 

Doors shall be provided
on both port and starboard.

Wheelhouse windows are to
be arranged to give good visibility all around as indicated in General
Arrangement Plan.

 

Storm rails shall be
provided on outside of wheelhouse as well as inside the wheelhouse front
console.

 

The wings of the bridge
shall recess inside of the side shell at 800 mm on each Side and Retractable
platform will be fitted in the wing bulwarks extend to 800mm.

 

Work station include a
desk and chair for captain shall be fitted in the wheelhouse.

The wheelhouse is to be
fitted with:-

 

•    Steering
control and instrumentation

•    Rudder
angle indicator (panoramic deck head mounted type)

•    Main
engine alarms and group alarms for auxiliary engine (common alarm indicating
generator engines failure) and steering gear

•    Horns
(one electrical air horn and mechanical plunger for horn)

•    One
searchlight with remote control, positioned off steering wheel, 1000W

•    3
horizontal type wiper come with fresh water washing and two clear view screen
on forward window. Central wheelhouse window heated.

•    Helmsman’s
chair (pilot chair with adjustable height, no sliding)

•    VHF,
radar as agreed in the electric nautical equipment

•    Clinometer,
thermometer, dial barometer

•    Wooden
grating for steering column

•    Chart
table curtain/collapsible lamp

•    Navigation
instrument sets

•    Two(2)
Binoculars c/w case

•    One(1)
chart table with drawers

•    Central
public address system

•    Filing
cabinet with 2 drawings near radio table

•    Flag
box

•    Assorted
book racks and cabinets

•    Spare
power slots

•    Space
D.C. power slots

•    Emergency
stop button for cargo pump motor

•    First
aid kit bag

•    Quartz
clock

•    Anemometer

 

5048 Interior Doors

 

All interior doors’
materials are to be fire rated as the surrounding bulkheads and as required by
SOLAS.

 

49

 

•    To
be hung on brass or chrome steel hinges and fitted with chrome door fittings

•    To
have lever handles and hook retainers

•    To
have labels overhead indicating compartment name

 

All locks and latches
shall have rim or mortise type easing to meet the requirements of the particular
installations.

 

Lock shall be furnished
so that each lock shall have a different key and all locks onboard except those
in the engine room shall be operated by a master key for each rim and mortise
type lock.

 

Doors in public rooms except stores shall be
provided with mortise type cylinder lock.

 

All non-watertight steel
doors shall be provided with cylinder locks.

 

A self-closer shall be
fitted on doors leading to galley, common wash place and engine room from
living quarters, doors inside the lobby of weather exposed to entrance of
living quarters on upper deck, doors at weather exposed entrance of living
quarters and doors of stairway trunk.

 

5049 Engine Control Room

 

To be situated on upper
platform deck and to be air-conditioned
unit (water- cooled type).

 

The following will also
be located within the engine control room:

•    Main
switchboard

•    Engine
control and alarm panel

•    Intercom
telephone system

•    Machinery
alarm panel

•    One(1)
writing desk with drawers (single pedestal type)

•    One(l)
file cabinet with 4 drawers

•    One(l)
book case

•    Two(2)
coat and hat hook

•    One(l)
coffee rack

•    One(l)
white board

•    One(l)
control room unit cooler

•    One(1)
set group starter for essential motor

•    Two(2)
arm chairs

 

50410 Cargo Control Room
and Ships office to be combined Office

 

A cargo control room
shall be located on the poop deck. The cargo control room layout shall be with
reference to General Arrangement Plan and Accommodation Plan.

 

The cargo control room
shall accommodate necessary controls required for the remote control of the
cargo and ballast systems include

 

•    start-stop
diesel engines that drive the cargo pumps.

•    engage
on/off the friction clutches between cargo pump and diesel engines.

•    control
bypass valves of the delivery line of cargo pumps.

•    pressure
indicators.

 

50

 

•    cargo tank high-level alarm system.

•    oily discharge monitoring panel.

•    clinometer and necessary gauges.

•    Remote value control of ballast valves and
cargo valves excluding manifold valves

 

Telephone, clock, P.A.,
high level alarm, level gauges, pump control buttons and Gauges

 

Other
Fittings

One(l)
white board c/w markings of ships tanks for daily record entry.

One(1)
desk c/w chair (Single pedestal type)

One(l)
filing cabinet

One(l)
clock

Four(4)
spare power slots

Three(3)
coat hangers

One(l)
Load computer system

 

50411 Crew and Officer
Mess Rooms

 

Followings shall be
fitted in the mess rooms:

 

•    One(l)
sideboard with drawers/cutlery drawers & hanging cabinet

•    One(l) clock, battery Quartz type

•    Four(4) spare power slots

•    One(1) “white” notice board

•    One(1) public address speaker

•    Upholstered chairs & settees as shown on
general arrangements

 

50412 Pantry x 2

•    One(1) [ILLEGIBLE] refrigerator

•    One(l) coffee maker

•    One(l) wash basin

•    One(1) cupboard with plate rack/glass rack and
etc...

 

50413 Dry Provision Store

This
compartment is to be fitted with wooden shelves and retaining bars.

 

50414 Refrigerated
Provision Store

 

[ILLEGIBLE]
(one working, one as stand by) each having a sufficient specified temperatures
within 18 hours of automatic operation per day is fitted. These refrigerating
chambers shall have vegetable, meat & fish
chamber with deep freezer.

 

51

 

	
  Cabinet

  	
   

  	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Volume

  	
   

  	
  Temperature

  
	
  Vegetable

  	
   

  	
  Reach
  in

  	
   

  	
  Abt.
  14 m3

  	
   

  	
  +40C

  
	
  Fish

  	
   

  	
  Reach
  in

  	
   

  	
  Abt.
  8 m3

  	
   

  	
  180C

  
	
  Meat

  	
   

  	
  Reach
  in

  	
   

  	
  Abt.
  16 m3

  	
   

  	
  -180C

  
	
  Lobby

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  8m3

  	
   

  	
  +80C

  

 

Capacities must be agreed
on General Arrangement Plan and Accommodation Plan.

 

Refrigerant shall be
R-404a. Each chamber shall be cooled by fan coil unit type with air cooler.
Valve panel shall be located adjacent to each cooler as per maker’s standard.
Heating around the door shall be fitted. The drainage in the fish & meat
room shall be installed. Refrigerator door should be opened on both side.

 

Cooling water shall be
supplied by central cooling system. The cooler in meat & fish chamber shall
have electric defrosting. Refrigeration compressors shall be regulated by
temperature switches. Two spare refrigerant containers to be supplied.

 

One storage rack of stainless steel with hardwood shelves
shall be provided for each vegetable, meat & fish chamber. Meat hooks for
hanging whole carcasses of meat shall be provided.

 

50415 Forward Stores

 

The spaces under the
forecastle deck shall be divided into windlass control room, paint store and
bosun store which are fitted with steel shelving with retaining bars.

 

Ample lighting, portable
fire extinguishers and natural/mechanical ventilators shall be arranged to meet
the classification requirements.

 

Wooden grating shall be
installed in Bosun store area.

 

50416 Steering Gear
Compartment

 

The steering gear
compartment is to be fitted with
necessary steering gear machinery, suitable ventilations and sound powered
telephone fitted for communication between wheelhouse and engine control room.

 

50417 Radio Space

 

Radio area in the
wheelhouse is to be fitted with:-

 

•    One
writing desk with drawers (single pedestal type)

•    One
swivel arm chair

•    One
file cabinet with 2 drawers

•    One
book case

•    One
whiteboard

•    Two
coat and hat hook

•    Radio
and communication equipment

 

50418 Emergency Generator
Room

 

This room is to be fitted
out with suitable insulation to meet SOLAS requirements.

 

52

 

as an emergency generator
room. Appropriate ventilation is to be provided.

 

50419 Workshop

 

The
workshop shall be fitted with:

 

•    One(1)
lathe machine of distance between the centres 1000 mm and diameter of 350mm

•    One(1)
wheel grinder, pedestal type complete with 2 wheels of 255mm diameter

•    Welding
machine complete with accessories of 300 Amp capacity (AC Inverter type)

•    Work
bench complete with 8” vice

•    Tool
cabinet

•    One(1)
gas welding set (to be installed outside of E.R.) with flashback arrestor at
nozzle c/w fixed pipes in workshop.

•    Bottles
to be placed on deck Outlet station to be placed in workshop.

•    Electrician’s
work shop to be fitted with electrical testing board and storage cabinets.

 

50420 Changing Room

 

The compartment is to be
fitted out with:

 

•    Dressing
cabinets

•    Bench
seats

•    Clothes
hooks

•    Coat
hooks

•    Shower

•    Wash
basin- Toilet

 

50421 Paint Store

 

It is to be fitted-with
steel shelves and mechanical ventilation. All electrical fittings and safety
requirement shall meet SOLAS requirements. The padlock shall be provided.

 

50422 Deck/Engine Store

 

This store is to be
fitted out with steel or wood shelves. Doors to be fitted with padlock. The
store shall be natural ventilated.

 

53

 

600 Deck Machinery and
Outfitting

 

601 General

 

Deck machinery shall be
arranged as shown on the General Arrangement Plan. Deck machinery consists two
electro hydraulic motor driven anchor windlasses located at the forecastle and
two electro hydraulic motor driven mooring winches located at all of poop deck
as shown on General Arrangement Plan.

 

Hydraulic power shall be
supplied for deck machinery (windlass, mooring winch etc.) from the hydraulic
power station and the hydraulic motors directly coupled to the winch or through
reduction gears if necessary. Hydraulic pump station for deck machinery shall
be arranged in suitable location.

 

Following is the summary
of main particulars of the deck machineries;

 

	
  Name of 

  equipment

  	
   

  	
  No. of 

  set

  	
   

  	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Duty capacity tons

  x m/min

  	
   

  	
  Prime motor

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Steering gear

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Electric-hydraulic Type

  	
   

  	
  [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
   

  	
  Hydraulic motors

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Anchor windlass

  	
   

  	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Hydraulic type

  Each 1 gypsy wheel, 1 hawser drum & 1 warping head.

  	
   

  	
  At gypsy wheel l0tx9m/min.

  At hawser drum 8.5tx15m/min rope length 180m

  	
   

  	
  Hydraulic motor with

  auto-tension device

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Mooring winch

  	
   

  	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Hydraulic type

  Each 1 hawser drums with auto tension function and 1 warping head

  	
   

  	
  At hawser drum

  8.5txl5m/min. ([ILLEGIBLE] layer)  At
  hawser drum Rope length 200m

  	
   

  	
  Hydraulic motor

  With auto-tension device

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Hose handling crane

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Elec-hyd. type

  	
   

  	
  2t x appr. 16m

  	
   

  	
  Hydraulic motor

  To be arranged near manifold

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Provision

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Electric type

  	
   

  	
  1.51 x 3.8m according to layout.

  	
   

  	
  Electric motor

  
	
  Rescue boat crane

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Bow thruster

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Electric CPP

  	
   

  	
  300 kW

  	
   

  	
  Electric motor

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Free fall boat davit

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  According to relevant rules.

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Electric motor

  

 

54

 

602 Anchor Windlasses

 

Two electro hydraulic anchor
windlasses each having a gypsy single mooring drum with slip and two warp
heads. The gypsy capacity to be approx. 10 tonnes pull at 9 m/min, suitable for
40mm diameter chain and mooring drum capacity 8.5 tonnes 15m/min at 1st layer.
The cable lifters and hawser drums are to be independently clutched. The hawser
drum shall have auto tension function.

 

	
  Gypsy

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  Suitable for 46 mm diameter chain

  
	
  Hawser Drum

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  Suitable for handling 200m of 250kn breaking
  strength

  
	
  Control

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  Mounted on steel pedestal suitable for on deck
  installation

  
	
  Seating

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  The windlass shall be mounted on chock fast seating
  using corrosive resistance bolts with a ‘save-all’ and gutter

  

 

603 Steering Gear

 

One (1) set of steering
gear system shall be arranged to drive the stream line rudder. The steering
gear is driven by one(1) set of
piston type steering gear with two(2) totally independent working hydraulic
pump units each driven by two electric
motors. One(1) pump unit shall be operated in normal service navigation and the
other shall serve as a standby. Both can be used during manoeuvering.

 

The rudder turning angle
shall be 2 x 35 degree. Either pump unit shall be able to supply enough power
to steer the rudder from 35 degree on the either side to 30 degree on the other
side within 28 seconds when the vessel is running ahead at service speed at
scantling draft.

 

Arrangements for
connection with auto pilot and manual control shall be made. Steering gear
motors shall be remote started & stopped from wheelhouse bridge console. Local
manual operation shall be able to done via operation of solenoid control valve
at the side of the gear as per the requirement of IMO and Class. The system
shall be connected with the power by emergency power from the emergency
switchboard.

 

Torque rating is about 11
metric ton – meter and shall be approved by the Class subject to the rudder
area.

 

Suitable grating shall be
fitted around the steering gear for
safer inspection and maintenance.

 

One fixed set of
hydraulic storage oil tank shall be provided in accordance with the requirement
of the Rules and Regulations. The tank shall have sufficient capacity to
recharge two power actuating system.

 

The lubricating system
driven by the two (2) electric motors, each 100% capacity shall be provided in
the steering gear room for the lubrication of rudder carrier by grease together
with the manual device for emergency.

 

The rudder angle
indicator of mechanical type shall be fitted on the steering gear body. The
rudder angle indicator shall be independent of the steering gear control system
and readily visible from the control position as well as in wheel house.

 

Mechanical stopper angle
shall be of 37° on each side. Low
level alarm of steering gear L.O. sump tank shall be provided in wheel house
and engine control room.

 

Working platform to be
provided around the control device for easy accessibility.

 

55

 

604 Stern Mooring Winch

 

Two sets of electrical hydraulic
Single Mooring Winches accompanied with each one hawser drum with auto tension
function and one warping head is [ILLEGIBLE] as following:

 

	
  Rating

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  8.5 tonnes at 15 m/min
  at 1st layer.

  
	
  Capacity

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  200 m of 250 kn
  breaking strength

  
	
  Warping

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  Cast steel keyed on
  ends of the main rotating shaft

  
	
  Control

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  Mounted on steel
  pedestal suitable for on deck installation

  
	
  Seating

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  The winch shall be
  mounted on chock fast seating using corrosion resistance bolts with a
  ‘save-all’ and gutter

  

 

605 Provision Handling
Crane/Spare Parts Handling/Rescue Boat Davit

 

Each One(1) set of
electric lifting crane shall be fitted. The capacity and outreach of the davit
will be according to the layout. (The crane structure consists of fixed crane
boom mounted on pedestal base with 1.5 tonne SW[ILLEGIBLE] lifting capacity at
maximum radius of -3.8 m.

 

The electric lifting
winch comprising of single drum driven by electric motor and pre-wiring for
hoisting.)

 

606 Hose Handling Crane

 

One set electric-hydraulic
hose handling crane, lifting capacity 2 tonnes at 16 m outreach. The working
area of the crane shall cover the cargo manifolds and pump room without
interfere the cargo piping system as indicated in the General Arrangement Plan.

 

607 Mooring Fitting

 

Anchors, chain cables and
mooring ropes shall be equipped in accordance with the rule requirements as per
following table.

 

	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Bow Anchor

  	
   

  	
  Stockless SPEK
  type, about 3300 kg, Cast steel construction with cone type swivel shackle.

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Spare Anchor

  	
   

  	
  Stockless SPEK
  type, about 3300 kg, Cast steel construction. One for each vessel

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Anchor Chain

  	
   

  	
  46 mm dia. X
  495.0 m in length, Grade 3 with Kenter shackles plus short chain with Kenter
  shackle to pass the chain stopper.

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Chain Releaser

  	
   

  	
  Fastened type in
  chain locker and operable from outside.

  
	
  4

  	
   

  	
  Mooring Rope

  	
   

  	
  Mooring rope of
  nylon fiber rope, 200 meters, (B.S. 250KN) including loop end.

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Towing Line

  	
   

  	
  Towing line [ILLEGIBLE]X190

  36 NAT8X19S–FC1570ZZ596

  

 

Two
chain stops shall be fitted on forecastle deck.

 

One pair of hawseholes,
fabricated of welded steel plate with steel bell mouth with square shape on

 

56

 

shell
and deck flange on deck, to be fitted at the bow and so located as to give a
satisfactory position of the anchors.

 

Two chain stops shall be fitted on forecastle deck.

 

Mooring fittings, such as
panama chock, bollards, panama fair leaders, guide rollers and mooring holes
shall be arranged in accordance with OCIMF requirement for reference as shown
on the General Arrangement Plan and Mooring Arrangement Plan.

 

608 Manifold

 

In way of cargo manifold
on upper deck, additional deck fitting, such as bollard, cross bitt and closed
chock shall be fitted refer to the OCIMF recommendation Category ‘A’ for
reference only.

 

609 Oil Spill Drain Tank

 

Oil spill collection tank
shall be fitted at the top of the
after wing ballast tank. The scupper shall be fitted on each side of the main
deck in the most aft part of the tank to drain
the oil into the deck oil spill tank.

 

The tank should be
emptied with overboard valve controlled from the main deck and with the
slop/stripping pump to the slop tank.

 

610 Mooring Equipment

 

All figures will subject
to the further calculation

 

	
  Bollard

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  355mm
  diameter double-bills as shown on General Arrangement

  
	
  Mooring
  pipes

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  355mm
  nominal size, cast steel as shown on General Arrangement

  
	
  Closed
  Chock

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  315mm
  nominal cast steel as shown on General Arrangement

  
	
  Fairleads

  	
   

  	
  :

  	
   

  	
  200mm
  dia single vertical rollers closed type as shown on General Arrangement

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  200mm
  dia double rollers closed type as shown on General Arrangement.

  

 

Only mooring equipment of
the vessel to be suitable for ship to ship transfer operations, such as bollard
and panama chocks.

 

Mooring layout of vessel
and detailed drawings of equipment shall be submitted to the Buyer for approval.

 

Eight (8) lashing lugs
shall be fitted on each side around the midship for fenders.

 

57

 

611 Ladders and Steps

 

6111 Accommodation
Ladders

 

Two aluminum
accommodation ladders with universal steps with davits driven by one portable pneumatic
winch shall be provided one port and one starboard along side of the
accommodation at poop deck.

 

One set of wharf ladder
is provided and located on the upper deck around midship. The wharf ladder is
about six (6) meters in length made of aluminum alloy.

 

Two
pilot ladders made of rope and timber along with the collection reel shall be
supplied.

 

6112 Steel Ladder and
Steps

 

All cargo oil/slop tanks
shall be fitted with vertical
ladders with the protection ring. The ladders shall be made of mild steel and
coated with the surrounding coat.

 

The steel vertical ladder
of 400 mm width and with 300 mm step spacing shall be provided in all bunkers,
ballast and fresh water tanks for access.

 

Steel vertical ladders or
steps to be also provided to deep tanks, service and settling tanks, unless
space is limited and approval duty obtained from Buyer, monkey steps will be
acceptable. Vertical ladders shall be fabricated with 65 mm x 9 mm mild steel
flat bar and step of a 22 mm square
bar with vertical diagonal.

 

Sufficient stairs and
ladders shall be arranged to provide
convenient access to all decks and platforms. All steps of stairs inside the
accommodation shall be made of steel covered with appropriate sound absorbing
material and finished with non -
slippery top layer. Aluminum or stainless steel angle bar shall be installed on front of each step
above the covering.

 

Ladders shall be generally bolted
to the structure. No vertical ladders are allowed in pump room and paint store.

 

612 Access Hatch and
Manhole

 

6121 Access and Manhole
for Cargo Oil Tanks

 

One set of access hatch
(swing away type) for each cargo oil tank, slop tank shall be fitted. The clear
opening of the access hatch is about 800 mm. The access hatch shall be arranged
as per General Arrangement Plan and be approved by the Buyer prior to
construction.

 

The hatch shall be
installed as much forward as possible. The swing away hatch cover shall be used
along with enough number of butterfly cleats. Each cargo tank entrance shall be
marked with C.C. (Cargo Compartment) and tank number by welding bead.

 

The round bar shall be
placed on top of hatch coaming made of stainless steel A1S1 316L. Gaskets
shall be able to resist the cargo spill out in
the cargo list. Hinge pins, lifting screws, pivoting axles, bushings and
threaded fasteners to be of stainless steel A1S1 316L.

 

The height of swing away
type hatch coaming shall be around 610 mm. The internal hatch coaming shall be
painted with same surrounding coat applied to the cargo hold.

 

58

 

6122 Access Manhole for
Water Ballast Tank

 

Two watertight bolted
flush type manholes cover with clear opening 600 x 800 mm (according to the
Class rules) shall be fitted on each water ballast tank in way of cargo area.
Each ballast tank to be provided with a sample hatch (2-inch) for sampling the
atmosphere in the tank bottom and top. Each ballast tank manhole shall be
clearly marked with tank name by welding bead.

 

6123 Tank Cleaning Hatch

 

At least two set of
hanged tank cleaning hatches of mild steel construction, of suitable size for
use with portable tank cleaning machine shall be provided on each cargo tank
and slop tank. Tank cleaning hatch dimensions are- 320 mm diameter, with a
height of 200 mm above longitudinal, which to be internally coated same as
surrounding tank coating.

 

The round bar on top of
coaming to be of stainless steel A1S1 316L, Gaskets must be cargo resistance.

 

6124 Sample Hatches

 

Each cargo & slop
tanks should be provided with a sample hatch with a minimum diameter of 125 mm
fitted with flame arrestor according the rules.

 

6125 Small Hatches

 

Following small hatch
shall be of hinged or bolted type shall be provided. The height of hatch
coaming shall comply with the requirement of class.

 

	
  Location

  	
   

  	
  No

  	
   

  	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Opening

  	
   

  	
  Operated by

  
	
  Upper deck for engine room spare parts lifting

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Watertight, hinged

  	
   

  	
  800 x 1200 with coaming

  	
   

  	
  Manual

  
	
  Poop deck for pump room

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Watertight, hinged

  	
   

  	
  800 x 1200

  	
   

  	
  Manual

  
	
  Forecastle deck for rope

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Watertight, hinged

  	
   

  	
  600 x 600 with coaming

  	
   

  	
  Manual

  
	
  Upper deck aft for steering gear room

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Watertight, hinged

  	
   

  	
  800 x 800 with coaming

  	
   

  	
  Manual

  

 

6126 Manholes

 

Manholes shall have steel
plate cover secured with stainless steel(SUS316) studs and nuts. Each manhole
cover shall be fitted with one or two hand grip and marked with the name of the
compartment.

 

The construction,
materials of the manhole with covers shall be in accordance with the Builder’s
standards unless otherwise specified.

 

59

 

 

	
  Location

  	
   

  	
  No

  	
   

  	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Opening

  	
   

  	
  Operated by

  
	
  Aft. Peak tank

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Waterlight, bolted or hinged type

  	
   

  	
  600 x 400 with coaming

  	
   

  	
  Manual

  
	
  Fuel Oil tank

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Oil tight, bolted

  	
   

  	
  600 x 400

  	
   

  	
  Manual

  
	
  Double bottom in engine room

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Oil tight, bolted
  with 100 mm coaming

  	
   

  	
  600 x 400

  	
   

  	
  Manual

  

 

Each manhole shall be
clearly marked with tank number/name by welding bead. No hand grip may be used
for all man hole covers on upper deck, steering gear deck and under forecastle
deck.

 

613 Fendering

 

An advanced fendering
system shall be arranged in order to well protect the vessel against the
frequency collision between this vessel and the vessel may get the bunker. The
fendering system include following portions:

 

a. Hard steel fendering
for upper deck at the sides and top of bilge strake on the  parallel mid ship. Rubber fender shall be
arranged for the forcastle’s deck side, poop deck at side and any other area
that the vessel is likely to
rouch the fore or aft at any angle until the Yokohama fenders may take over the
loads.

 

The stiffener of side
shell in way of Yokohama fender position shall be strengthened. The area for
applying Yokohama fender shall be clearly marked on the side of ship.

 

But Bow Fendering
Material to be supplied by Buyer.

 

614 Life
Saving Appliances

 

Life saving appliances
shall be furnished completely in accordance with SOLAS requirements and its
Amendments 1981, 1983, 1988 and 1994 and all amendments until the contract has
been signed. All equipment to be type approved by the maritime
authority of the registered nation or its assigned authority.

 

	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Lifeboat Suitable for Oil Tanker

  	
   

  	
  GRP, enclosed free fall type, water cooled diesel
  engine driven for 18 persons.

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Lifeboat davit

  	
   

  	
  Recovered A type, driven by fixed electric motor.

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Rescue boat

  	
   

  	
  GRP, driven by diesel engine with 6 persons

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Rescue boat davit

  	
   

  	
  To compliance with Rules and SOLAS required.

  

 

60

 

	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Life raft

  	
   

  	
  Inflatable type, with 18 persons for each stowed in
  fiberglass containers with approved launching device. One for each side (P&S) as per SOLAS
  regulation.

  
	
  8

  	
   

  	
  Life buoy

  	
   

  	
  2 – with self-igniting light of electric battery
  type. 2 – with self-activating smoke signal 4 – with 30 meters life lines

  
	
  24

  	
   

  	
  Life jacket

  	
   

  	
  18 – Inflatable SOLAS approved life jackets stowed
  in the wardrobes of cabin 6 –
  stowed in the public place

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Line throwing appliance

  	
   

  	
  Complete with four life lines and four (4)
  projectiles not less than 230m

  
	
  12

  	
   

  	
  Parachute distress rocket signals

  	
   

  	
  As per SOLAS requirement

  
	
  6

  	
   

  	
  Rocket signals

  	
   

  	
  As per SOLAS requirement

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  Survival suits

  	
   

  	
  Supplied as per SOLAS requirement

  

 

615
Personal Protection

 

Protective
equipment and safety equipment shall be provided in accordance with SOLAS and
Authority requirements.

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Fire extinguisher

  	
   

  	
  As per the rules and regulations

  
	
  4

  	
   

  	
  Fireman’s outfit

  	
   

  	
  4 – Self-containing air-breathing apparatus 4 –
  Protective clothing, boots, gloves and tight-fitting goggles 4 – Fireproof
  lifeline with belt resistant to the cargo 4 – Explosion-proof lamp

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Fully charged spare air bottles

  	
   

  	
  For each breathing apparatus.

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Stretcher with lifting device

  	
   

  	
  As per SOLAS

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  First aid equipment

  	
   

  	
  In wheel house/cargo office/eng.control room and
  galley

  

 

61

 

	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Flammable gas detector

  	
   

  	
  As per SOLAS

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Toxic gas detector

  	
   

  	
  As per SOLAS

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Oxygen detector

  	
   

  	
  As per SOLAS

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Oxygen resuscitation

  	
   

  	
  As per SOLAS

  

 

EEBD sets according the
latest SOLAS requirements

 

616 Fire Fighting System

 

The fire precaution, fire
extinguishing and fire fighting apparatus shall be provided in compliance with
the SOLAS, Class and Authority concerned.

 

All fire and foam pumps
are to be operable from wheelhouse.

 

	
  Cargo tank deck area

  	
   

  	
  Fixed low expansion deck foam suitable for oil
  products. 

  Sea water

  
	
  Engine room & Pump room

  	
   

  	
  Fixed high pressure CO2 system, 

  Sea water hydrants 

  Portable CO2 fire extinguisher 

  Portable foam extinguisher 

  Local application water based system

  
	
  Accommodation

  	
   

  	
  Sea water 

  Portable fire extinguisher, Fire detection System (IC method in SOLAS Reg.)

  
	
  Paint store

  	
   

  	
  Water spray connected to the main line, controlled
  just outside the paint store.

  
	
  Bow thrust room.

  	
   

  	
  Portable dry powder, 

  Portable CO2 fire extinguisher.

  
	
  Galley

  	
   

  	
  Portable dry powder 

  CO2 fire extinguisher over the oven

  
	
  Wheelhouse

  	
   

  	
  Portable dry powder

  

 

The
whole fire protection to be included fire extinguishing equipment and fire detection & alarm.

 

A
fixed local application fire fighting water mist system to be protecting high
risk item/area (main

 

62

 

engine,
aux. engine, boiler and
purifier, etc.) in engine room to comply with SOLAS, 2000 Amendment.

 

617 Fire Hydrant System

 

Fire
hydrant system combined with the deck washing service shall be arranged with
sufficient hydrants at easy accessible positions. The fire mains/wash line
shall be led to all hull parts, deck tanks, accommodation quarters and engine
room.

 

Fire
hydrants on weather deck and in engine room shall be located such as to be
capable of supplying two (2) jets of water simultaneously to any part of the
spot in the space.

 

In
engine room the system shall consist of branch lines on floor, platforms and
tank top. Fire hydrants are fitted on all platforms beside the branch lines.

 

International
hose coupling stop values of approved type shall be arranged in suitable
position so that the jets from two (2) hose nozzles can reach any part of the
vessel at same time in accordance with the regulations.

 

Fire
hoses:

One
(1) x 15m hose c/w spray-jet nozzle for each hydrant stowed in reel and box.

 

Fire
buckets:

Two
(2) c/w attached lanyard and stowed in wooden stand.

 

Fire
main shall be served by fire pump installed in engine room with independent
suction and also connected with the emergency fire pump.

 

The
emergency fire pump shall have independent suction and shall be connected to
fire main with stop value. It shall be able to be operated under the lightship
condition. Non-return valves shall be fitted at emergency fire pump discharge
side. One emergency fire pump to be located on ship bow.

 

The
emergency fire pump shall take direct suction from the sea chest in emergency
pump room and connect with the fire main /hydrants. Emergency fire pump can
also be used for ballast pump for how peak ballast tank.

 

Particulars
for Fire/ General Pump, Bilge/General Service Pump as followings: (Capacities
according to the regulations)

 

	
  No. of sets

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set/ One (1) set

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Vertical centrifugal pump with self-priming.

  
	
  Capacity

  	
   

  	
  ~90
  m3/h

  
	
  Pressure

  	
   

  	
  7 bar

  
	
  Drive

  	
   

  	
  Electric motor

  

 

63

 

Particulars
for Emergency Fire Pump as following: (Capacities according to the regulations)

 

	
  No. of sets

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Vertical centrifugal pump with self priming.

  
	
  Capacity

  	
   

  	
  ~
  40 m3/h

  
	
  Pressure

  	
   

  	
  7 bar

  
	
  Drive

  	
   

  	
  Electric motor

  

 

618 Foam Fire Extinguish
System

 

Ship
shall be equipped with independent fixed foam system as per the requirement of
SOLAS.

 

The
deck foam fire extinguishing system shall be served by the fire/foam pump
through main foam line.

 

The
system shall be able to deliver the foam to the entire deck of cargo tank area
as well as into any cargo tank.

 

The
system includes foam pump, foam mixing pump, mixer, foam tank, fixed monitors
and etc. The certified foam shall be suitable for all oil cargoes the vessel
may carry.

 

Foam
shall be generated from foam compound and sea water mixed at a proportion
ejector. The foam water rate shall be in accordance with requirements of Class
and SOLAS. Foam monitors shall be of approved type.

 

The
rate of supply of foam solution shall be not less than the greatest of the
following :

 

a)   0.61/minute
per square metre of cargo deck area where cargo deck area means the maximum
breadth of the ship multiplied by the total longitudinal extend of the cargo
tank spaces.

 

b)   6l/minute
per square metre of the horizontal sectional area deck of the single tank
having the largest such area.

 

619 CO2 Smothering System

 

An
approved CO2
extinguishing system is to be provided for engine room and pump room. The
system shall comply with the latest SOLAS regulations.

 

Audible
warning devices shall be operated before releasing the CO2 gas. All engine room ventilation fans, steam
heater forced draft fans, pump room fans shall be automatically stopped and
quick closing fuel valves closed by opening CO2 release box door.

 

The
necessary pipes and controls shall be supplied. Instruction for manual
operation of CO2
shall be displayed at suitable position. Arrangement shall be provided for
weighting of CO2 bottles.

 

CO2 piping shall be tested according to the
requirements of the Classification Society and relevant Authorities.

 

64

 

Piping Material

 

	
  Piping

  	
   

  	
  Dia

  	
   

  	
  Piping Material

  	
   

  	
  Flanges and fittings

  	
   

  	
  Remarks

  
	
  CO2 pipes

  	
   

  	
  All

  	
   

  	
  Galv. steel

  	
   

  	
  ISO

  	
   

  	
   

  

 

620 Mist Spray Fire
Fighting System

 

Mist spray fire fighting
system shall be installed to comply with Solas code to serve the following
areas:

 

•    Heads of main engines

•    Heads of generators

•    Heads of cargo pump engine

•    Burners of boilers

•    FO Purifiers

 

The components of the
mist spray fire fighting system are as follows:

 

•    Water spray

•    Detectors

•    Receiver and fire fighting
controller, manual operator, and extension indicator panels

•    Pressure water supplier

•    Solenoid water supply valves

•    Visible and audible alarm
units

 

621 Fire
and General Alarm System

 

Fire detection and alarm
systems shall be equipped according to requirements of Rules and Regulations.

 

Fire
Alarm

Alarm bells for general
alarm to be used as fire alarm via a time delay.

 

The fire and smoke
detection and alarm shall be designed and installed according to the authority
requirement.

 

General alarm to be
operated on 24 V DC.

One (1) master switch in
wheelhouse.

 

Audible and visual alarm
to be incorporated into fire alarm in E/R.

 

CO2
Alarm

One(1) CO2
release alarm switch to be installed in CO2 release box.

 

Suitable numbers of bells
with lamp or electric horn in engine control room, engine room, workshop,
separator room and steering gear
room.

 

65

 

700 Equipment for Cargo

 

701 General

 

The
cargo oil loading/unloading system will be arranged for efficient
loading/discharging petroleum products with flash point below 60 deg.
centigrade, in accordance with good marine practice. The system shall be able
to carry out cargo transferring, stripping, heating, ballasting and cleaning
system.

 

Two
(2) sets of screw type cargo oil pump with 750[ILLEGIBLE] and another one (l)
set of screw type cargo oil pump with 300[ILLEGIBLE] shall be provided in cargo
pump room for 3 grade cargo. The cargo pumps shall be driven by independent
diesel engines through a gas tight gland from engine room.

 

One
(1) set of screw type pump with 150[ILLEGIBLE] for stripping, the stripping
pump is driven by elec. motor.

 

The
system to be able to load and discharge three (3) different grades of cargo oil simultaneously without contamination.

 

Separation
each other by double shut valve during cargo handling except stripping
operation. That means the cargo pumping system shall be designed to facilitate
easy loading and cleaning operations.

 

The
general discharge and loading design criteria are as follows:

 

	
  Design pumping criteria

  	
   

  	
  Pressure head: 90[ILLEGIBLE]. at pump outlet with
  cargo S.G. 0.8 [ILLEGIBLE]

  
	
  Cargo viscosity

  	
   

  	
  1.0cSi-700cSt@50 Deg C

  
	
  Design discharge time

  	
   

  	
  4 hours at design criteria with 3 cargo pumps
  running  simultaneously, incl.,
  Stripping.

  
	
  Maximum discharge rate

  	
   

  	
  1800 [ILLEGIBLE] at90mLC., S.G.0.8 [ILLEGIBLE]

  
	
  Maximum loading rate

  	
   

  	
  Total abt. 1800 [ILLEGIBLE].

  
	
  Segregation

  	
   

  	
  •    Full
  segregation (3 separate cargo tanks) 

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  •    Simultaneous
  discharge of Three (3) grades via separate pumps and manifolds.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  •    Simultaneous
  loading of three (3) grades over manifolds and direct drop lines in main
  line in cargo tanks.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  •    2-value
  segregation between tanks.

  

 

702 Loading and Discharging System for Liquid Cargo

 

Cargo & stripping/Slop pumps

 

Cargo
pumps to be installed in pump room driven by independent diesel engine in engine room delivering to discharge to
the manifolds. Cargo pumps are dual suction, individual, screw type pumps.

 

66

 

(1) Cargo pump

 

	
  Number of units

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Two (2) sets

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Single stage,
  screw type pumps

  
	
  Design capacity

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  2 sets x 750 [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
   

  	
  1 set x 300[ILLEGIBLE]

  
	
  Design pressure
  head at outlet

  	
   

  	
  90 mLc, S.G. 0.8
  [ILLEGIBLE]. 1.0
  cSt

  And be able to handle the contents at 90 mLc, S.G. 

  1.025 [ILLEGIBLE], 700 cSt.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Materials

  	
   

  	
  Casing

  Power rotor

  Idle rotor

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  Carbon steel

  Carbon steel

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  Carbon steel

  Carbon steel

  
	
  Drive and power

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Diesel engine in
  engine room.

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Abt. 450 kw

  	
   

  	
  Not less than
  200 kw

  
	
  Shaft seal

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Mechanical seal

  	
   

  	
   

  

 

(2) Cargo Stripping/Slop pumps

 

	
  Number of units

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Horizontal twin
  screw type

  
	
  Design capacity

  	
   

  	
  1 set x 150 [ILLEGIBLE]

  
	
  Design pressure
  head at outlet

  	
   

  	
  90 mLc, S.G. 0.8
  [ILLEGIBLE], 1.0
  cSt

  And be able to handle the contents at 90 mLc, S.G.

  1.025 [ILLEGIBLE], 700 cSt.

  
	
  Drive and power

  	
   

  	
  Electric motor
  in engine room.

  Not less than 120 kw

  
	
  Mounting

  	
   

  	
  Vibration
  damping resilient mount.

  

 

The cargo stripping pump
to be used as slop pump also.

 

Cargo Piping

 

The
system to be able to discharge and load three (3) different grades of cargo oil
simultaneously without contamination.

 

When discharging oil,
three (3) sets of screw type cargo pump shall be worked simultaneously, total
discharge rate to be 1800 [ILLEGIBLE]
at 90 mLc and to be capable of discharging cargo oil completely during 5 hours,
including stripping. One (1) set of stripping pump with capacity of 150 [ILLEGIBLE] at 90

 

67

 

mLc to be applied for
cargo tank stripping. Also the stripping pump shall be used for slop pump.

 

There are three (3) upper
deck main lines and three (3) manifolds on upper deck cargo oil range, one (1)
for each segregation. The manifold and associated equipment shall refer with
OCIMF recommendation, as practice.

 

Cargo oil pipe systems in
cargo tanks and on upper deck shall be mild steel pipe (designing pressure 1.5
Mpa).

 

A cargo tank crossover
valve to be provided in the pump suction well of each tank. Individual
connecting pipe to be installed in the left and right slop tank to let oily
water two-stage deposit.

 

Each cargo oil tank has a
loading pipe (drop lines) which goes toward its own tank bottom and connects
with cargo oil main lines on upper deck. The drop lines in cargo tanks to be of
mild steel also.

 

The Oil Companies
International Marine Forum’s (OCIMF) Standard for Tanker Manifold and
Associated Equipment, latest issue), to be accordance with, where relevant.

 

The cargo piping system
to be arranged as follows:

 

	
  Cargo piping

  	
   

  	
  2/1 - Discharge main line of ND 250 mm / ND 200 mm
  on upper deck respectively.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  2/1 - Crossovers
  pipes of ND250/ND200 mm on upper deck, one (1) for each segregation.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  2/1
  - Cargo manifold of 250 mm/200 mm to be arranged at amid-ship (P&S) on
  upper deck as per OCIMF standard.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  2
  - Discharge main line of ND 80 mm on upper deck, one (1) for each slop
  tank.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  1 - Slop
  collection line of ND 125 mm.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  1 - Crossover
  line for manifolds.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  10 - Suction
  well in each cargo and slop tank.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  3 - Cargo drop line of ND 250 and 200 mm for each
  cargo tank/slop tank through the main line via. cargo drop line and/or cargo
  oil pump.

  

 

68

 

	
  Drip trays

  	
   

  	
  Drip trays with gratings and drains to be fitted
  underneath Port & Starboard cross over line manifold. 

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  Size and volume of trays shall generally be
  according to IMO and OCIMF regulations.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  Drain lines to be of mild steel also.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  A stern drip tray to be fitted astern.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Cargo valve

  	
   

  	
  All cargo butterfly valve in cargo tank as well as
  on deck and in ballast tank to be hydraulic remote operated from CCR.

  

 

After completion of the
discharge phase the stripping of the cargo system to be carried out by the
cargo stripping/slop pump through stripping pipe in cargo tank suction well.

 

A cargo control room to
be fitted for remote control of the cargo pumps, stripping/slop pump, ballast
pumps, ballast and cargo valves. Also a remote tank level gauging system, an
oil discharge monitoring system and a pipeline mimic diagram with remote
operation of valves to be located in the cargo control room.

 

703 Cargo Heating System

 

The cargo heating coils
shall be installed in cargo tanks (P&S) and slop tank (P&S) for cargo
heating.

 

The cargo is heated with
steam delivered to heating coils of stainless steel AISI 3l6L of DN40 in cargo
and slop tanks. The steam boiler shall supply the saturated steam to heating
coils in cargo and slop tanks.

 

The cargo heating system
to be capable of maintaining cargo at 55°C
with sea temperature 5°C and ambient air
temperature 2°C.

 

The heating capacity to
be sufficient to raise temperature of a cargo load from 55°C to 75°C
in 96 hours with ambient air temp. 2°C and sea water
temperature 5°C. Slop tank heating to be capable of raising the
temperature of a 50% slop tank from 15°C to 66°C
in 24 hours under the same ambient conditions.

 

Heating pipe on deck to
be of pre-insulated mild steel pipes.

 

Heating system valves to
be manually operated from tank deck.

 

704 Cargo Tank Vent/Gas
Free System

 

Cargo Tank Venting System

 

A venting system to be
installed providing for individual venting of each cargo tank as well as for
common venting either into the atmosphere or for collection on shore.

 

All cargo tanks and slop
tanks (P&S) to be provided a breath valve with air venting pipe and

 

69

 

discharges outlet at
Class required level above main deck for venting and breathing.

 

All tank vent-lines to be
of mild steel and the Press/Vac valves with capacity which is complied with max
filling and discharge capacity shall be of stainless steel SIS 316L.

 

Gas Free System

 

Venting and drying system
shall be provided by means of portable water driven fans, Two (2) portable fans
(including hose connections, etc.) to be delivered. The fan to operate through tank cleaning hatches.
The capacity of fan to be about 3600 [ILLEGIBLE] for each, capable of reducing the flammable
atmosphere of the two largest cargo tanks.

 

705 Tank Cleaning Systems

 

Tank cleaning system and
equipments to be suited to minimize shadow areas and agreed in cooperation with
the Maker and Owner to comply with the requirement of SOLAS & MARPOL. The tank washing system to be
arranged for washing with hot or cold seawater.

 

The open cycle washing to
be provided. Four(4) sets of portable tank cleaning machine on main deck shall
be provided for tank washing. Two (2) portable tank wash hatches shall be
arranged for each cargo tank.

 

A tank washing main line
with branches and connections for tank washing devices to be arranged on main
deck.

 

The tank cleaning system
shall be arranged for manual operation of valves and connecting of hoses on
deck.

 

The fire pump and/or
general service pump shall take suction of sea water from the sea chest. The
water shall be delivered to tank cleaning main line through the tank cleaning
heat-exchanger in pump room platform.

 

The cargo pump or
stripping pump shall take suction of washed oily water from the cargo oil tanks
and discharge to the port side slop tank.

 

Oily water shall be
transferred from the port side slop tank to the starboard side slop tank via
levelling line.

 

Portable Tank Cleaning
Machine

 

	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Twin nozzle type

  
	
  Material

  	
   

  	
  Stainless Steel

  
	
  Nozzle diameter

  	
   

  	
  8 mm

  
	
  Capacity each

  	
   

  	
  12 m/h

  
	
  Pressure

  	
   

  	
  6 bar

  

 

Tank Cleaning Heater

 

One (1) tube type
tank-wash heat-exchanger to be fitted in deck house forward to poop.

 

70

 

The heat exchanger to
have steam supply from steam boiler in engine room and to have capacity of
utilising total heat produced from boilers and to deliver washing water of 70°C
for simultaneous operation of Four (4) Tank Cleaning Machine, with sea water
temperature 20°C.

 

706 Vapour Emission
Control System

 

The vapour emission control system shall be
provided for the cargo oil and slop tanks as per USCG. The drain points and
sloped piping shall be arranged accordingly. One (1) vapour collecting manifold shall be provided
near the cargo manifolds to return the vapour from the cargo oil and slop tanks
to shore during the loading and awaiting condition. The tank venting lines and
branch lines shall be commonly used as vapour collection pipe and the main pipe
shall be connected to the vapour
collecting manifolds. The spill tank and working platform for cargo manifolds
shall be extended to accommodate the vapour collecting manifolds. Four (4)
shore connections of about ND 200 mm for presentation flange shall be provided
for vapour collecting manifold.

 

707 Auxiliary System
& Equipment for Cargo

 

Cargo and ballast
operations to be carried out from the cargo control room.

 

There shall be a loading
and operational computer with terminal, display unit and printer installed in
the cargo control room.

 

	
  Cargo and ballast pump control

  	
   

  	
  Remote start/stop the
  cargo & stripping pump, and ballast pumps from cargo control room.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  Emergency stop from
  pump room/manifold location/bridge.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Cargo/ballast valve remote control

  	
   

  	
  Hydraulic remote
  operation of major cargo/ballast valves incargo/ballast tank from deck and
  cargo control room.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  Hydraulic remote
  operation of major cargo/ballast valves in pump room both from the pump room
  roof and cargo control room with local manual hyd.operation device.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  The position indication
  (open/close) of valves to be indicated in cargo control room.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Manifold valve control

  	
   

  	
  Local manually operation
  at manifold side.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Cargo tank level gauge

  	
   

  	
  Radar beam type with
  remote readout in C.C.R. for each cargo and slop tank, high level alarm to be
  integrated with levelgauge.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Independent high-high level alarm

  	
   

  	
  One (1) for each
  cargo oil tank and slop tank with alarm.

  

 

71

 

	
  Cargo tank temperature gauge

  	
   

  	
  Two (2) sensors for
  each cargo & slop tank with
  remote readout in cargo control room.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Ballast tank level gauge

  	
   

  	
  Electric Pheumatic type
  with remote readout from cargo control room.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Draught gauge (4 points)

  	
   

  	
  Electric Pheumatic type
  with remote readout from cargo control room.

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Oil pollution prevention system

  	
   

  	
  Oil discharge
  monitoring & control system according to MARPOL 73/78  (Annex I)

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Portable cargo monitoring equipment

  	
   

  	
  For ullage measuring,
  oil/water interface detecting, temperature measuring by means of portable
  oil/water interface detector on upper deck.

  

 

708 Cargo Control Room

 

One (1) cargo control
room to be arranged at accommodation deck forward.

 

One (1) micro-processor
based cargo monitoring and loading computer including two (2) screens, two (2)
keyboards and printer at the control console and panel in cargo control room to cover the following functions:

 

•    Remote level measurement with
high alarm in cargo /slop tank.

•    Remote level gauging of all
ballast tanks, F.O. tanks, F.W. tanks.

•    Remote control of
cargo/ballast valves in cargo/ballast tanks and pump room.

•    Independent high-high level
(overflow) alarm for cargo /slop tanks.

•    Temperature monitoring of all
cargo tanks and slop tanks.

•    Draft of the vessel (4 points).

•    Oil discharge monitoring & control system.

•    Position indication of
hydraulic remote controlled valves.

•    Loading computer with software
programs (on line).

•    The BHD penetration, pump
casing, shaft temperature monitor and alarm for Cargo pump and ballast pumps.

 

709 Oily Water Discharge Monitoring and
Control

 

For the prevention of
marine pollution, an oil discharge monitor, control system and potable oil/
water interface device to be provided to meet IMO RES. A 586(XIV) requirements.
The system comprised the following main components.

 

(l)   Oil content meter

(2)  Flow meter

(3)  Operator’s console

(4)  Valve control unit

 

Drip
trays with mild steel grating shall be fitted beneath port and starboard
manifolds.  Which size and volume of
trays shall refer to IMO & OCIMF
requirements.

 

72

 

710 Blender &
Flowmeter

 

A two inlets one outlets
blender shall be arranged on the upper deck at the portside of midship close to the manifold. Two flowmeters at the
inlets shall be arranged and one viscostat will be arranged at the outlet of the blender. The capacity of the
blender shall be bigger enough to handle of the mix of the maximum capacity of
two segregation of cargo discharged by two individual cargo pumps. Three
flowmeters with filters installed before the inlet of the flowmeter will be
arranged at the outlet of manifold.

 

73

 

800 Ship’s Service System

 

801 Ballast System

 

Ballasting and
de-ballasting system to be provided for double bottom and wing ballast tanks as
well as fore peak tank and after peak tank.

 

Two (2) sets of single
stage, vertical centrifugal type water ballast pump driven by electric motor to
be installed in pump room. One (1) ballast educter of 50 [ILLEGIBLE] to be
filled in pump room, which driven by the ballast pumps.

 

The pumps to be remotely
operated from cargo control room, and shall have piping arrangement for
effective filling and discharge of water ballast tanks.

 

The ballast pumps to have
suction from sea chests in pump room and deliver to two (2) main ballast lines
installed in each side of the double bottom with branches to each ballast
double bottom and wing tank as well as fore peak tank.

 

The particulars of water
ballast pump to be as follows for each to deballast the vessel within five (5)
hours.

 

	
  No. of sets

  	
   

  	
  Two (2)

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  single stage, vertical centrifugal type pump, self
  prime

  
	
  Capacity

  	
   

  	
  200 [ILLEGIBLE]

  
	
  Pressure

  	
   

  	
  25 [ILLEGIBLE]

  
	
  Drive

  	
   

  	
  Electric motor driven

  

 

A
ballast delivery line to deck in cargo manifold area for connection to cargo
cross over by spool piece for emergency ballasting to be arranged.

 

Ballast
valves shall be of butterfly type and in general hydraulically remote operated
from cargo control room.

 

For
the remote level measuring system of water ballast tanks to be controlled and readout at cargo
control room.

 

Arrangement
for local gas detection in ballast tanks and closed space in dangerous area to
be fitted. (Pipes on main deck, designed for portable gas detection equipment).

 

The
fire/general service pump shall be connected to the sea main suction line and
serve as aft peak tank ballast pump.

 

802 Bilge Piping

 

Bilge
piping shall be arranged according to the
Class Rules and Authorities requirements.

 

74

 

Water
in steering gear room shall be drained to engine room and bilge wells through
self-closing valve in
engine room.

 

Chain
lockers, stores rooms in forecastle, cofferdam and bow thruster room to be
served by bilge ejectors of 5 [ILLEGIBLE]. Drive water supplied by
fire/deck-wash line.

 

Dirty
oil tank with capacity according to rules to be arranged.

 

Oily Bilge Pump

 

	
  No. of sets

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Screw or piston type or Manufacturer’s standard

  
	
  Capacity

  	
   

  	
  To be according to oily water separator capacity

  
	
  Pressure

  	
   

  	
  3 bar

  
	
  Drive

  	
   

  	
  Electric motor

  

 

Oily Water Separator

 

	
  No. of sets

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set

  
	
  Capacity

  	
   

  	
  1 [ILLEGIBLE], below 15 PPM

  
	
  Automation

  	
   

  	
  Automatic oil contents monitoring and alarm system

  

 

803 Drainage System

 

Sufficient
number of scuppers of suitable dimension to be fitted to all decks, deck house
and casing tops, etc.

 

Deck
opening of cargo area to be closed off by mechanical expanding plugs.

 

804 Sounding System

 

Sounding
pipes for manual sounding shall be fitted to F.O. tanks, F.W. tanks, W.B.
tanks, sludge tanks, drain tanks, cofferdams, void spaces, chain locker etc.,
except cargo and slop tanks. Pipes shall terminate at accessible locations.

 

Graded
view glass to be used where suitable, for instance for LO tanks.

 

The
sounding points shall be located as near to the suction pipes as possible.
Small tank sounding connection shall terminate at the tank.

 

No
sounding pipes to pass through cargo tanks.

 

Sounding
pipes extending to open deck to be fitted with bronze cap.

 

75

 

Self
closing sounding head to be fitted for sounding pipe of double bottom tanks in
engine room.

 

The
material of sounding pipes for WB and FW tanks shall be galvanized steel and
for oil tanks (not cargo tanks) shall be mild steel.

 

A
remote sounding system for draught, water ballast tanks, F.O. tanks based F.W.
tanks based on electric pneumatic measurement to be fitted.

 

805 Air-Conditioning
System

Air-Conditioning
system to be installed to serve as ventilation, cooling and heating for all
living rooms, public rooms, offices and wheel house.

 

Main
particular of air-conditioning system to be as Follows:

 

One
(1) - Central unit, consisting of refrigerating compressor, supply fan, cooling
chamber, heating chamber, filters, and necessary attachments.

 

The
system is to consist of a high velocity, central unit, single duct system and
designed to meet following conditions:

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Tropical condition

  	
   

  	
  Winter

  condition

  	
   

  
	
  Water temperature

  	
   

  	
  32°C

  	
   

  	
  0°C

  	
   

  
	
  Outside air temperature / Relative Humidity

  	
   

  	
  35°C
  / min. 70%

  	
   

  	
  -5°C
  / 50%

  	
   

  
	
  Inside air temperature / Relative Humidity

  	
   

  	
  27°C
  / 50%

  	
   

  	
  20°C
  / 30%

  	
   

  

 

In
mild climates for certain sailing area when cooling is not required, the system
to serve as mechanical
ventilation for the accommodations, supplying fresh air only. And air changes
are to be about 6 times per hour for living room and to be about 8 times per hour for public
room.

 

One
(1) packaged air conditioning unit to be arranged for engine control room.

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Tropical condition

  	
   

  
	
  Outside air temperature / Relative Humidity

  	
   

  	
  35°C
  / 70%

  	
   

  
	
  Inside air temperature / Relative Humidity

  	
   

  	
  27°C
  / 50%

  	
   

  

 

At
least 2 air changes per hour.

 

Refrigerant
for all air conditioning plants to be R-404a.

 

806 Mechanical
Ventilation

 

Mechanical Ventilation
for Accommodation

 

Following
compartments to be served by mechanical supply or exhaust ventilation system, capable of giving the following
rate of air changes per hour.

 

76

 

	
  Compartment

  	
   

  	
  Air change

  (times/hour)

  	
   

  	
  Mechanical 

  Supply 

  (times/hour)

  	
   

  	
  Mechanical 

  Exhaust

  (times/hour)

  
	
  Living space

  	
   

  	
  6

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  —

  
	
  Public space

  	
   

  	
  8

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  —

  
	
  Office space

  	
   

  	
  8

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  —

  
	
  Wheelhouse & chart
  space

  	
   

  	
  6

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  —

  
	
  Cargo control room

  	
   

  	
  10

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  —

  
	
  Sanitary space

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  15

  
	
  Laundry, shower rooms

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  10

  
	
  Galley

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  40

  	
   

  	
  40

  
	
  Locker

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  	
  10

  

 

The
ventilation system to be of low pressure system.

 

For
compartments where only mechanical exhaust ventilation is applied, the air to
be supplied from adjoining passageways through louvers on the entrance door
and/or by natural ventilators.

 

Mechanical Ventilation
for Machinery Space

 

(1)  Engine room fan

 

The
fans for engine room to be axial flow type. The ventilation fan to supply fresh
air to the operating stations and necessary places in the engine room through
air ducts.

 

	
  Number of set

  	
   

  	
  2 sets

  
	
  Capacity each

  	
   

  	
  100% higher than consumption of all combustion
  machinery and boilers according to class rules

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  •    Axial
  flow 

  •    Reversible
  el. -motor driven

  •    One
  of the fans to have start/stop outside engine room

  

 

(2)  Purifier room exhaust fan

 

	
  Number of set

  	
   

  	
  one (1)

  
	
  Capacity each

  	
   

  	
  According to size of compartment

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Axial flow/Non-reversible, el. -motor driven

  

 

77

 

(3)  CO2 room exhaust fan

 

	
  Number of set

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Capacity each

  	
   

  	
  According to size of compartment

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Axial flow / El. -motor driven.

  

 

The fan and driving motor
to be incorporated in fan casing, the fan and motor to be mounted in common bed
plate. Fan impeller to be dynamically balanced.

 

807 Natural Ventilation

 

Mushroom, gooseneck or
wall ventilators to be fitted for ventilation of store spaces, steering gear
room, etc., wherever.

 

808
Refrigerated Provision Store

 

Two (2) refrigerating
plants (one working, one as stand-by) each having a sufficient capacity to keep
the following insulated refrigeration provision chambers at specified
temperatures within 16 hours of automatic operation per day. These
refrigerating chambers to be vegetable, meat &
fish chamber with deep freezer.

 

	
  Cabinet

  	
   

  	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Volume

  	
   

  	
  Temperature

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Vegetable

  	
   

  	
  Reachin

  	
   

  	
  14 m3

  	
   

  	
  + 4°C

  
	
  Fish

  	
   

  	
  Reachin

  	
   

  	
  8 m3

  	
   

  	
  -18°C

  
	
  Meat

  	
   

  	
  Reachin

  	
   

  	
  16 m3

  	
   

  	
  -18°C

  
	
  Lobby

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  8m3

  	
   

  	
  + 8°C

  

 

Refrigerant to be R-404a.
Each chamber to be cooled by fan coil unit type air cooler. Remote temperature
indicators to be provided for each chamber with read out in galley. Valve panel
to be located adjacent to each cooler as per maker’s standard. One push button
with alarm in each chamber with alarm bell provided in the galley.

 

Cooler in meat & fish
chamber to have electric defrosting. Refrigeration compressors to be regulated
by temperature switches, Two spare refrigerant containers to be supplied.

 

Gratings, shelves,
lockers, potato bin of wood on galvanized steel rames etc. to be provided in
dry provision. One storage rack of stainless steel with hardwood shelves to be
provided for each vegetable, meat & fish
chamber.

 

78

 

900 Machinery Part

 

901
General

 

The main propulsion unit
shall be a medium speed diesel engine through gear boxes, and driving a fixed
pitch propeller through line of shafting respectively.

 

The engine to be arranged
as a single bank engine with clockwise direction locking forward.

 

The maneuvering stand for
the main engine shall be located in wheelhouse, bridge wings and in the
centralized control room in the engine room. For emergency condition it shall
be controlled at engine side.

 

The main engine and
boiler shall be designed so as to burn heavy fuel oil with a viscosity up to
380 cSt at 50°C under a normal
sea going condition and maneuvering.

 

The electric generating
system shall consist of three-(3) sets of main diesel generators, and one (1)
emergency generator.

 

The main switchboard
shall be suitably arranged in the centralized control room and emergency
switchboard shall be arranged in the emergency generator engine room.

 

The capacity of the power
plant to be based on the following conditions:

 

	
  Conditions

  	
   

  	
  Number of sets working

  	
   

  
	
  Normal sea
  service

  	
   

  	
  One D/G

  	
   

  
	
  Sea service with
  tank washing

  	
   

  	
  One D/G

  	
   

  
	
  Maneuvering

  	
   

  	
  Two D/G

  	
   

  
	
  Harbour

  	
   

  	
  One D/G

  	
   

  

 

Generator engines shall
be designed to burn marine diesel oil.

 

The heating plant for the
vessel shall consist of one (1) oil-fired thermal oil boiler and one (1)
exhaust gas economizer. The oil fired thermal oil boiler is used for fulfilling
the usage of cargo oil tank heating, cargo oil tank cleaning sea water healing
and hot water heating for domestic usage. The exhaust gas economizer is used
for improving the heat recovery.

 

Air compressors and pumps
for the propulsion system shall be so designed that the main engine is
satisfactorily operated at maximum continuous output with following design
conditions:

 

	
  Sea water temperature

  	
   

  	
  32°C

  	
   

  
	
  Fresh water temperature

  	
   

  	
  38°C

  	
   

  
	
  Ambient temperature

  	
   

  	
  45°C

  	
   

  
	
  Atmospheric pressure

  	
   

  	
  0.1 Mpa

  	
   

  
	
  Relative humidity

  	
   

  	
  60%

  	
   

  

 

79

 

902 Principal Particulars
of Machinery

 

Main Engine

 

One (1) – DAIHATSU
8DKM-28 2500 kW or equivalent

 

4-stroke cycle, in-line,
water cooled, direct injection, single acting, trunk piston irreversible,
medium speed type marine diesel engine with turbocharger and air cooler.

 

	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  DAIHATSU 8DKM-28

  	
   

  
	
  Number of set

  	
   

  	
  One (1)set

  	
   

  
	
  Max, Continuous Output

  	
   

  	
  2500 kw x 750 rpm

  	
   

  
	
  Continuous Service Rating (85% MCR)

  	
   

  	
  2125 kw

  	
   

  
	
  No. of cylinder

  	
   

  	
  8

  	
   

  
	
  Dia. of cylinder

  	
   

  	
  280 mm

  	
   

  
	
  Stroke of piston

  	
   

  	
  390 mm

  	
   

  
	
  Brake mean eff. Press

  	
   

  	
  23.5 bar

  	
   

  
	
  Fuel oil consumption rate

  	
   

  	
  ~
  l94g/kw.h at MCR

  	
   

  

 

Main engine to comply
with MARPOL 73/78 Annex. VI Regulation 13 (Mandatory code on NOx emission).

 

Flexible Couplings

 

Maker Vulkan or similar,
final coupling type will be based on the torsional vibration calculation for
propulsion shafting.

 

One (1) Flexible coupling
between main engine and – gear box.

 

Reduction Gearbox

 

	
  Model:

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Type:

  	
  Twin stages reduction
  gear, reversible type, vertical inline with Hydraulically operated multidisc
  clutch

  
	
  Number:

  	
  One (l) sets

  
	
  Reduction ratio:

  	
  ~ 3.75 : 1

  
	
  Propeller speed:

  	
  About ~200
  rpm

  

 

The
thrust bearing shall be lined with white metal and lubricated by forced oil as
per maker’s standard.

 

Shafting, Stern Tube and
Bearing

 

The
shafting of forged steel to consist of one propeller shaft with gear box
subject to main engine maker final configuration.

 

80

 

Shafting to consists of:

 

One (l) propeller shaft

Simplex split type
sealing system to be provided.

The stern tube shall be
of welded construction of steel plate and welded to the stern frame boss and
constructed as a part of hull structure.

 

The stern tube to be
provided with white metal lined cast iron bushes having dimensions as per rules
requirements. The stern tube inner part to be oil filled.

 

Oil pressure to be
provided by gravity tank installed at suitable height in accordance with the
seal maker’s recommendations. Lubricating of the stern tube bearings to be
carried out in accordance with Builder’s standard practice.

 

A torsional vibration
analysis for the propulsion system, consisting of the main engine shafting,
propeller, gear box and coupling system will be carried out by the manufacture
of the main engine in accordance with Classification Societies.

 

Shaft Tachometer

 

One (1) set of combined tachometer
showing revolution speed of propeller shaft and main engine shall be fitted.
The result to be read out in wheelhouse and engine control room.

 

Shaft Earth Device

 

One (1) set of shaft
earth device should be equipped on the shaft.

 

Propeller:

 

One (1) fixed pitch
popeller shall be installed in accordance with the propeller manufacturer’s
standards.

 

	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Fixed
  pitch type

  	
   

  
	
  Number

  	
   

  	
  One
  (1) set

  	
   

  
	
  Diameter
  of propeller

  	
   

  	
  About
  3400 mm

  	
   

  
	
  Revolution
  of propeller

  	
   

  	
  200
  rpm

  	
   

  
	
  Material

  	
   

  	
  Ni-Al-Bronze

  	
   

  
	
  Manufacturing
  tolerance

  	
   

  	
  Class
  1 of ISO 484/1

  	
   

  
	
  Spare
  propeller

  	
   

  	
  One
  (1) spare propeller

  	
   

  

 

Maneuvering by speed
control to be operated from the wheelhouse and the bridge wings.

 

81

 

Heating Plant

 

The vessel to be fitted
with one (1) oil-fired steam boiler and one (1) exhaust gas economizer. The
boiler’s capacity to be suitable for max. cargo heating and tank washing
requirements. The boiler to supply heated steam to the following system:

 

•      Heating coils for cargo
tanks (316L Stainless steel heating coils)

•      Heating coils for slop tanks
(316L Stainless steel heating coils)

•      Heating coils for HFO
storage, service and settling tanks

•      Heating of fuel system
components as required

•      Accommodation heating via.
air conditioning unit

•      Domestic hot water healing

 

Aux. boiler:

 

	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Oil fired steam boiler

  	
   

  
	
  Number

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set

  	
   

  
	
  Capacity

  	
   

  	
  abt. 6000kg/h x 6kg/cm2
  with feed water temperature 60 degC

  	
   

  
	
  Fuel

  	
   

  	
  HFO 380cSt @ 50 deg C

  	
   

  

 

Exhaust gas economizer:

 

	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Exhaust gas

  	
   

  
	
  Number

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set

  	
   

  
	
  Capacity, exhaust
  heated

  	
   

  	
  Max utilization of
  available waste heat in main engine exhaust, according to manufacturer’s
  recommendation

  	
   

  
	
  Pressure

  	
   

  	
  6kg/cm2

  	
   

  

 

Electric Generating Plant

 

All generators to be of
drip-proof marine type, brushless and self-magnetizing with voltage regulation.
The power plant to include:

 

Three (3) — Diesel
generator sets

One (1) — Emergency
generator

 

Main Diesel Generator
Sets

 

(1)       Diesel engine:

 

	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Turbo-charged, 4-stroke
  marine diesel engine.

  	
   

  
	
  Rated horse power

  	
   

  	
  About 450 kw

  	
   

  
	
  Rated revolution

  	
   

  	
  About 1800 rpm

  	
   

  
	
  Cooling

  	
   

  	
  Fresh water, built-on
  pumps

  	
   

  

 

82

 

	
  Lubrication

  	
   

  	
  Wet Sump

  
	
  Fuel type

  	
   

  	
  Marine diesel oil

  
	
  Starting

  	
   

  	
  Compressed air

  

 

Arrangement for pre-lubrication
of stand-by engine is to be provided. Start/stop from ECR or local, whichever
is in control mode.

 

(2)       Alternator:

 

Drip proof,
self-ventilated, brushless type about 400 kW AC.450V, 60Hz. at 1800 r/min.

 

Emergency Generator Set

 

A diesel driven emergency
generator set to be provided in emergency generator room. The emergency
generator room is to be well insulated and diesel generator to be mounted on
resilient foundations to minimize noise transmission.

 

(1)       Emergency
generator engine:

 

	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  4-stroke, marine type.

  
	
  Rated horse power

  	
   

  	
  abt. 100 kw

  
	
  Rated revolution

  	
   

  	
  1800 r/min.

  
	
  Cooling

  	
   

  	
  Air-cooled (Radiator cooler)

  
	
  Lubrication

  	
   

  	
  Wet Sump

  
	
  Fuel type

  	
   

  	
  MDO

  
	
  Starting

  	
   

  	
  Electric batteries / Manual spring

  

 

(2)       Emergency
Alternator:

 

	
  Output

  	
   

  	
  Approx. 87 kw

  
	
  Revolution

  	
   

  	
  1800 rpm

  
	
  Voltage

  	
   

  	
  450 V

  
	
  Frequency

  	
   

  	
  3 phase, 60 Hz

  

 

83

 

Compressed Air Plant:

 

(1)       Air
Compressors:

 

	
  Name

  	
   

  	
  No.

  	
   

  	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Capacity

  (m/h)

  	
   

  	
  Discharge press

  (MPa)

  	
   

  	
  Cooling

  	
   

  
	
  Main air
  Compressor

  	
   

  	
  2

  	
   

  	
  E.V. 2-stage

  	
   

  	
  -.25

  	
   

  	
  3

  	
   

  	
  Water-cooled

  	
   

  
	
  Emer. air
  compressor

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  E. Screw

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  0.7

  	
   

  	
  Water-cooled

  	
   

  

 

(2)       Air
Reservoirs:

 

	
  Name

  	
   

  	
  No.

  	
   

  	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Capacity (m/h)

  	
   

  	
  Pressure

  (MPa)

  	
   

  
	
  Main start-air
  reservoir

  	
   

  	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Welded steel
  construction

  	
   

  	
  0.5

  	
   

  	
  3

  	
   

  

 

The main start-air reservoir shall supply to the control air system
through pressure reducing value and drier.

 

Pumps:

 

In general the water
pumps to be centrifugal type and to be driven by electric motor, capacity of
pumps to be selected according to Class and Regulations and actual requirements.

 

	
  Component

  	
   

  	
  Fresh water pump

  	
   

  	
  Sea water pump

  	
   

  
	
  Casing

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  	
   

  	
  Bronze

  	
   

  
	
  Impeller

  	
   

  	
  Bronze

  	
   

  	
  Phosphor bronze

  	
   

  
	
  Shaft

  	
   

  	
  Stainless steel

  	
   

  	
  Stainless steel

  	
   

  
	
  Gland seal

  	
   

  	
  mechanical seal

  	
   

  	
  mechanical seal

  	
   

  

 

And the oil pumps to be
of screw type and gear type and to be driven by electric motor. The capacity of
pumps to be selected according to Class and Regulations and actual requirements
also. The Motor power and revolution shall be decided finally by the
manufacturer’s standard.

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Gear pump

  	
   

  	
  Screw pump

  	
   

  
	
  Casing

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  	
   

  
	
  Gear rotor

  	
   

  	
  Carbon steel

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Shaft

  	
   

  	
  Carbon steel

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Power rotor
  shaft

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Carbon steel

  	
   

  
	
  Idle rotor shaft

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Carbon steel

  	
   

  
	
  Gland seal

  	
   

  	
  Mechanical

  	
   

  	
  Mechanical

  	
   

  

 

84

 

Purifiers

 

	
  Name

  	
   

  	
  No

  	
   

  	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Capacity for each

  	
   

  	
  Max. density at

  15°C

  	
   

  
	
  H.F.O./D.O.
  purifier

  	
   

  	
  2/1

  	
   

  	
  E.C. auto self-cleaning Steam heating

  	
   

  	
  Sufficient capacity to serve 130% fuel consumption
  of M/E at 100% MCR.

  	
   

  	
  0.991 kg/m

  	
   

  
	
  Lub. oil
  purifier

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  E.C. auto self-cleaning Steam heating

  	
   

  	
  In accordance with main engine maker’s
  recommendation.

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  

 

Fresh Water Generator:

 

	
  No of sets

  	
   

  	
  One (1) set

  
	
  Capacity, each

  	
   

  	
  Max production with M.E. at CSR abt,: 10t/day

  
	
  Type

  	
   

  	
  Low pressure, plate type

  
	
  Sea water temp.

  	
   

  	
  32°C

  

 

903 Piping System in
Engine Room

 

Fuel Oil System

 

Fuel
oil system shall be installed for main engine, auxiliary engines, steam boiler
and emergency generator engine, and arranged with bunkering, purifying, supply
and drain system.

 

FO
bunker lines to be fitted with fuel sampling cocks at fitting connections.

 

Main
engine, boiler shall to burn the HFO oil and aux. diesel engines, cargo pumps
diesel engines shall to burn marine diesel oil.

 

	
  1/1
  – 

  	
  HFO/MDO
  transfer pump, horizontal, gear type

  
	
  2/1
  – 

  	
  HFO/MDO
  purifier, sludge & water discharged, automatic, self-cleaning, (max.
  specific gravity of 0.991) each capacity to serve 130% fuel consumption of
  the main engine at 100% MCR based on 50 sec. at 50°C.

  
	
  1
  – M/E FO boaster unit

  
	
  1
  – Sludge pump, horizontal, 10 m/hr at 3 bar

  

 

 

85

 

1/1 – HFO/MDO settling
tank

1 – HFO service tank

2 – MDO service tanks

1/1 – HFO/MDO overflow
tank

1 – Sludge tank

1 – Waste oil tank

* HFO purifier heaters is
cross connected for MDO

 

Lub. Oil
System

 

The lubricating oil
coolers (tube type) shall be designed with fresh water temperature of 38°C 

(for M/E) or seawater
temperature of 32°C.

 

1 – L.O. transfer pump,
Screw type

1 – L.O. purifiers, automatic,
self-cleaning, partial discharge type, the capacity as per maker recommendation

1 – L.O. purifier
heaters, steam heated

1 – L.O. purifier feed
pumps, horizontal

1 – Main engine L.O. pump
(Stand-by), capacity based on maker’s standard

1 – Main engine L.O.
Cooler, plate type, capacity based on maker’s standard

1 – Main engine L.O.
Filter, auto back flushing type

1 – Lube oil storage tank

1 – Stern tube L.O.
gravity tank

 

Cooling
Water System

 

The cooling water system
for cooling of main engine to be a
central sea water/fresh water cooling system, main engine shall be provided
with one independent cooling system.

 

The cooling system shall
be designed based on the machinery maker’s recommendations and system
schematics to be approved by the owner.

 

(1) Sea Water Cooling
System

 

	
  2 – 

  	
  Main cool S.W. pump,
  vertical, cent. type, capacity subject to heat balance calculation (one set
  for stand-by)

  
	
  1 – 

  	
  Seawater inlet filters

  
	
  1 – 

  	
  Aux. seawater cooling
  pump, vertical, cent. type, capacity
  subject to heat balance calculation, for air condition cooler, provision
  refrigerated unit

  
	
  1 – 

  	
  Ejector pump for F.W.
  generator, cent. type

  
	
  2 – 

  	
  Sea chest in engine
  room (one high and one low)

  
	
  1 – 

  	
  Sea chest in pump room

  
	
  1 – 

  	
  Sea chest for emergency
  fire pump

  
	
  2 – 

  	
  Sea water strainers
  (strainer element; galvanized steel)

  
	
   

  	
  (2) Fresh Water Cooling
  System

  
	
  2 – 

  	
  Central cooler,
  Titanium plate type, 60% of the total requirement each with seawater temp. at
  32°C, fresh water outlet temperature 38 deg C.

  
	
  2 – 

  	
  Low temp. cooling F.W.
  pumps, Cent. vertical type, Capacity based on central cooling F.W. heat
  balance

  
	
  1 – 

  	
  High temp. cooling F.W.
  pumps, Cent. vertical type, Capacity based on central cooling F.W. heat
  balance

  
	
  1 – 

  	
  M/E jacket cool, water
  pre-heater

  
	
  2 – 

  	
  F.W. expansion tank

  

 

86

 

904 Workshop Machinery

 

1 – Lathe, center
distance 1000 mm

1 – Grinding machine,
double wheel type, dia. 255 mm

1 – Electric welding
transformer, capacity AC 300 Amp.

1 – Gas welding equipment
(2 oxygen and 1 acetylene bottles)

1 – Welding table

1 – Fuel valve testing
equipment each for M/E and A/E

1 – Work bench with one
vice for electrician

2 – Steel cabinets

 

905 Material for Pipes
and Valves in E.R.

 

Material and size of
pipes, valves, and fittings are to be in accordance with following tables.

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Pipe

  	
   

  	
  Material of Valve

  
	
  System

  	
   

  	
  Nominal dia. (mm)

  	
   

  	
  Material

  	
   

  	
  Wall thickness

  	
   

  	
  Body

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  3Mpa

  Compressed

  air

  	
   

  	
  50mm and above

  40mm to 15mm

  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Seamless

  steel

  copper

  	
   

  	
  A

  	
   

  	
  Cast steel

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  0.7Mpa

  Compressed

  air

  	
   

  	
  50mm and above

  40mm to 15mm

  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Seamless

  steel

  Copper

  	
   

  	
  A

  	
   

  	
  Cast steel

  Bronze

  Bronze

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Fuel oil

  	
   

  	
  50mm and above 40mm to 15mm

  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Seamless steel

  copper

  	
   

  	
  STD and A for

  50mm & below

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron, Cast steel

  or Bronze

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Lubrication oil

  	
   

  	
  50mm and above

  40mm to 15mm

  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Seamless

  steel

  Copper

  	
   

  	
  STD and A for

  50mm & below

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron, Cast

  steel or Bronze

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Fire fighting,

  Bilge

  Sanitary

  	
   

  	
  50mm and above

  40mm to 15mm

  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Seamless

  Steel, Hot galvanized

  Copper

  	
   

  	
  STD and A for 50mm & below

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  Cast iron or

  Bronze

  Bronze

  

 

87

 

	
  Ballast

  	
   

  	
  All size

  	
   

  	
  Seamless

  steel galv.

  pipe

  	
   

  	
  A or B

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Sea suction and overboard discharge valves on shell

  	
   

  	
  80mm and above

  65mm and below

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  C

  	
   

  	
  Cast steel

  Bronze

  

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Pipe

  	
   

  	
  Material of Valve

  
	
  System

  	
   

  	
  Nominal dia. (mm)

  	
   

  	
  Material

  	
   

  	
  Wall thickness

  	
   

  	
  Body

  
	
  Cooling seawater

  	
   

  	
  50mm and above

  40mm to 15mm

  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Seamless

  steel, Hot

  galvanized

  Copper

  	
   

  	
  A for 100 mm

  & below, STD

  for 125 & 

  above

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  Cast iron or Bronze

  Bronze

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Cooling fresh water 

  	
   

  	
  50mm and above 40mm to 15mm

  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Seamless

  steel,

  Copper

  	
   

  	
  STD and A for

  50mm & below

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron Cast iron

  or Bronze

  Bronze

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Domestic

  fresh, Tank,

  filling line

  	
   

  	
  50mm and above

  40mm to 15mm

  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Seamless

  steel Galv.

  Copper

  	
   

  	
  STD and A for

  50mm &

  below

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  Bronze

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Domestic hot

  water

  	
   

  	
  10mm and below

  	
   

  	
  Copper

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Bronze

  

 

88

 

	
  Exhaust gas

  system

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Welded steel

  plate or

  Seamless steel

  	
   

  	
  5mm

  STD

  	
   

  	
  Cast iron

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Escape pipe

  from safety

  valve of

  boiler

  	
   

  	
  All size

  	
   

  	
  Seamless steel

  	
   

  	
  STD and A for

  50mm &

  below

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Overflow pipe,
  Air vent.

  	
   

  	
  All size

  	
   

  	
  Seamless steel

  	
   

  	
  B

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  CO2
  fire

  extinguishing

  	
   

  	
  All size

  	
   

  	
  Seamless steel, Glav.

  	
   

  	
  Std

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Scupper soi1

  	
   

  	
  All size

  	
   

  	
  Seamless steel, hot galvanize

  	
   

  	
  STD and A for 

  50mm & below

  	
   

  	
   

  

 

Remarks:

 

Material of pipes fitted
on the main engine, generator engines and auxiliary machinery shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s standards.

 

Material
of the butterfly valve shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
standards. Butterfly valves shall be double flanged.

 

The
wall thickness of ballast pipes to be in accordance with SCH 80.

 

All
sea water lines should be galvanized.

 

a) Seamless Steel Pipe

 

	
  Nominal

  diameter

  	
   

  	
  Outside

  diameter

  	
   

  	
  Wall thickness (mm)

  	
   

  
	
  (mm)

  	
   

  	
  (mm)

  	
   

  	
  STD

  	
   

  	
  A

  	
   

  	
  B

  	
   

  	
  C

  	
   

  
	
  15

  	
   

  	
  22

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  2.5

  	
   

  	
  3.0

  	
   

  	
  3.5

  	
   

  
	
  20

  	
   

  	
  27

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  2.5

  	
   

  	
  3.0

  	
   

  	
  3.5

  	
   

  
	
  25

  	
   

  	
  34

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  3.0

  	
   

  	
  4.0

  	
   

  	
  5.0

  	
   

  
	
  32

  	
   

  	
  42

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  3.5

  	
   

  	
  4.0

  	
   

  	
  6.5

  	
   

  
	
  40

  	
   

  	
  48

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  4.0

  	
   

  	
  5.0

  	
   

  	
  6.5

  	
   

  
	
  50

  	
   

  	
  60

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  4.0

  	
   

  	
  5.0

  	
   

  	
  6.5

  	
   

  
	
  65

  	
   

  	
  76

  	
   

  	
  4.0

  	
   

  	
  5.0

  	
   

  	
  6.0

  	
   

  	
  7.5

  	
   

  
	
  80

  	
   

  	
  89

  	
   

  	
  4.0

  	
   

  	
  5.0

  	
   

  	
  6.0

  	
   

  	
  7.5

  	
   

  
	
  100

  	
   

  	
  114

  	
   

  	
  4.0

  	
   

  	
  5.0

  	
   

  	
  6.0

  	
   

  	
  8.0

  	
   

  
	
  125

  	
   

  	
  140

  	
   

  	
  5.0

  	
   

  	
  6.0

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  8.0

  	
   

  
	
  150

  	
   

  	
  168

  	
   

  	
  6.0

  	
   

  	
  8.0

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  9.0

  	
   

  
	
  200

  	
   

  	
  219

  	
   

  	
  8.0

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  10.0

  	
   

  
	
  250

  	
   

  	
  273

  	
   

  	
  9.0

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  12.0

  	
   

  
	
  300

  	
   

  	
  325

  	
   

  	
  10.0

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  12.0

  	
   

  
	
  350

  	
   

  	
  377

  	
   

  	
  10.0

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  12.0

  	
   

  

 

89

 

b)        Copper
pipe

 

	
  Nominal diameter

  	
   

  	
  Outside diameter

  	
   

  	
  Wall thickness (mm)

  	
   

  
	
  (mm)

  	
   

  	
  (mm)

  	
   

  	
  Ordinary pipe

  	
   

  	
  Press Pipe

  	
   

  
	
  4

  	
   

  	
  6

  	
   

  	
  1.0

  	
   

  	
  —

  	
   

  
	
  6

  	
   

  	
  10

  	
   

  	
  1.0

  	
   

  	
  1.5

  	
   

  
	
  10

  	
   

  	
  15

  	
   

  	
  1.5

  	
   

  	
  2.0

  	
   

  
	
  15

  	
   

  	
  20

  	
   

  	
  1.5

  	
   

  	
  2.0

  	
   

  
	
  20

  	
   

  	
  25

  	
   

  	
  1.5

  	
   

  	
  2.0

  	
   

  
	
  25

  	
   

  	
  30

  	
   

  	
  1.5

  	
   

  	
  2.0

  	
   

  
	
  40

  	
   

  	
  45

  	
   

  	
  2.0

  	
   

  	
  2.5

  	
   

  

 

906 Miscellaneous
Equipment in Engine Room

 

1 — E/R overhead crane,
electric driven, SWL 1 ton

1 — Incinerator, capacity 180,000 kcal/h, capable of burning sludge and feeding
sluice.

 

907 Automatic Control and
Monitoring Instrumentation

 

General

 

Automatic control, remote
operation and central supervision to be provided in accordance with the
requirements of and builder’s practice.

 

Propulsion plant to be
started from engine control room, and to be stopped either from bridge or
engine control room.

 

Control function of the
main engine to be provided for emergency in accordance with manufacturer’s
standard.

 

The instrument gauges and
alarms to be arranged in good order for safety operation and easy maintenance.

 

Audio and visual alarm
shall be provided in engine room.

 

Alarm and monitoring
system to be fed from UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply - 15 minutes) in case of
power failure.

 

90

 

Maneuvering Control
System

 

The Main control console
to be located at the centre of Navigation Bridge to comply with LR CCS
requirements and meet the requirements as workstation for docking operations.

 

(1)       Console
and panels in wheelhouse

 

The console and panels
incorporating electric equipment are to be provided and installed in the
wheelhouse as specified below:

 

•    Steering gear start/stop
button & run/alarm lamps.

•    Rudder angle indicator

•    Steering lever and wheel

•    Instrument light dimmer

•    Navigation light panel with
x-mas tree MIMIC panel

•    General alarm push button

•    Fire alarm panel

•    Emergency stop buttons

•    Light switches for outside
lights

•    Window wiper control and
washing / heating switches

•    Telegraph transmitter panel
(selector type)

•    Machinery alarm system
according to Class

•    M.E. and propeller control
panel with indicators

•    Air whistle

•    Bow thruster control panel

 

(2)       Console
on bridge wings

 

•    Steering lever

•    Rudder angle indicator

•    Morse signal light receptacle

•    Air-whistle push button

•    Search light control handle
over each console

•    Bow thruster control panel

•    M.E. and propeller control
panel with indicators

 

(3)       Console
in ECR

 

•    M.E. control panel with
indicators including start and stop.

•    Revolution indicators for ME
and turbochargers

•    M.E. safety system (M.E. shut
down and slow down)

•    Machinery alarm and monitoring
system with watch panel

•    Telegraph receiver panel
(selector type)

•    Telephones

•    Propeller shaft revolution
indicator

•    Speed log repeater

•    Fire alarm push button

•    Remote start and stop of
diesel generator engines

•    All other necessary equipment
for controlling the engines, according to manufacturer’s specification and
class notation.

 

91

 

Alarm / Monitoring System

 

The alarm and monitoring
plant shall meet the requirements for the Classification notation for and
secure safe operation of the ship and machinery at all times.

 

A centralized and
computerized engine room alarm and monitoring system with alarm and monitoring
points according to the Register’s requirements and manufacturer’s proposal
comprising sensors analogue and on/off signals to be located in the engine
control room. Sub-panels in accommodation and in wheelhouse.

 

Presentation of most
important parameters by analogue instruments, in accordance with class and
owners requirements.

 

All alarm and measuring
points will be presented by 2 CRT monitors, divided in logical functional
groups, Continuous registration of important parameters to disk, and printer to
be arranged.

 

Audio-visual alarms to be
installed according to rules included in the audio-visual alarm signal system
there is to be rotating lights and sirens in oil engine spaces.

 

When the machinery is
stopped manually, none of the alarms to become operational.

 

A Dead Man System and
duty indicator panel, indicating engineer on duty, to be incorporated in the
control room and bridge maneuvering console.

 

In the engineers’ cabins,
in the officers’ day- and mess rooms and in the ships office there will be
installed an alarm with sound and visual alarm.

 

Bilge well alarms for
pump room, bow thruster room and fire emergency pump room, if placed below
forecastle, will be arranged in engine control room.

 

For acquisition and
monitoring of measured data form the machinery plant in the engine room, the
engine room monitoring and alarm system shall be provided on the monitoring control
console.

 

System functions are as
follows:

 

(1)   Connection
of binary transmitters.

(2)   Connection
of analog transmitters.

(3)   Time
delay of alarm signals.

(4)   Suppression
of alarm signals.

(5)   Audible
alarm by means integrated buzzer and by external hooters.

(6)   Group
alarm formation for extension alarm system.

(7)   Monitoring
of exhaust gas mean value deviation.

(8)   Alarm
recording and data lopping with printer.

(9)   System
self - monitoring.

 

Extension alarm and
engineer call system electrically separated.

 

Boiler Automatic System

 

Automatic control device
for auxiliary boiler to be arranged at the auxiliary boiler side and ECR.

 

Generator Control System

 

Generator engines to have
automatic starting and shopping device and to be controlled from the

 

92

 

engine control room and
engine side.

 

One (1) set of auto
synchronizer load sharing and load shifting device to be provided.

 

One (1) set of
self-supported, drip-proof, steel plate and dead-front type main switchboard to
be installed in the engine
control room.

 

Monitoring System for
Liquid Cargo Tanks

 

For acquisition and
monitoring of measured data from cargo storage tanks. The system shall be
provided in control panel on CCR. Functions of the monitoring and alarming are
as follows:

 

(1)   Monitoring
of liquid level in cargo tanks.

(2)   Monitoring of temperature in cargo tanks.

(3)   Monitoring of pressure in cargo tanks.

(4)   Visual and audible alarms in the cargo control panel on upper deck.

 

Remote Control System For
W.B. Tanks’ Valves

 

Remote control valve of
ballast tanks shall be provided in the cargo control panel on upper deck,
system functions are as follows:

 

(1)   Open
of valve

(2)   Close
of valve

(3)   Start
and stop of all ballast pumps

(4)   Indicating
stop of ballast pump

(5)   Emergency
stop of ballast pump

(6)   Alarm
panel of control system failure

 

Remote Control System For
Cargo System

 

(1)   Open
of Valve

(2)   Close
of Valve

(3)   Start
and Stop of All Cargo Pump

(4)   Indicating
Stop of Cargo Pump

(5)   Emergency
Stop of Cargo Pump

(6)   Alarm
Panel of Control System Failure

(7)   Cargo
Pump Speed Control

 

93

 

1000 Electrical
Installation

 

1001 General

 

All electric installation
and equipment must comply with the Rules and regulations specified in section
104 along with the standard issued by the International Electro – Technical
Commission.

 

All electric equipment
and materials intended to be used must be suitable for shipboard use. All
electric equipment is to be located on easy accessible places. All electrical
equipments should be earthen correctly with earth wire. The use of the cable
shield for safety earthen is not permitted. Care to be taken for reducing the
risk of damage of equipment by leakage of water and oil, etc. from pipes or
tanks, or by excessive heat, or mechanical damage and as possible as to avoid
vibration on all electrical equipments.

 

Cables for power supply
to installations must be of approved type accompanied with class certificates.
Cables passing trays and support must be according to the Rules. No cable shall
be painted. All cables in bosun store, steering gear room and on exposed deck
shall have PVC mantle outside.

 

Spare parts are to be in
accordance with Class requirements.

 

1002 Power System

 

The power system is to be
as follows:

 

	
  Item

  	
   

  	
  Voltage

  	
   

  	
  Frequency

  	
   

  	
  Phase

  	
   

  	
  Conductor

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Generator

  	
   

  	
  450V AC.

  	
   

  	
  60 Hz

  	
   

  	
  3

  	
   

  	
  3 wire

  	
   

  
	
  Electric motor

  	
   

  	
  440V AC.

  	
   

  	
  60 Hz

  	
   

  	
  3

  	
   

  	
  3 wire

  	
   

  
	
  Galley and mini
  equipment

  	
   

  	
  220V AC.

  	
   

  	
  60 Hz

  	
   

  	
  3

  	
   

  	
  3 wire

  	
   

  
	
  Heating

  	
   

  	
  220V AC.

  	
   

  	
  60 Hz

  	
   

  	
  3 or 1

  	
   

  	
  3 wire

  	
   

  
	
  General lighting

  	
   

  	
  220V AC

  	
   

  	
  60 Hz

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  2 wire

  	
   

  
	
  Emergency
  Lighting

  	
   

  	
  220V AC.

  	
   

  	
  60 Hz

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  2 wire

  	
   

  
	
  Nautical
  equipment

  	
   

  	
  220V AC.

  	
   

  	
  60 Hz

  	
   

  	
  3

  	
   

  	
  3 wire

  	
   

  
	
  Radio Equipment

  	
   

  	
  220V AC.

  	
   

  	
  60 Hz

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  2 wire

  	
   

  
	
  Interior communication

  	
   

  	
  24V DC.

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  2 wire

  	
   

  
	
  General alarm
  etc.

  	
   

  	
  24V DC.

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  1

  	
   

  	
  2 wire

  	
   

  

 

All systems should be
insulated against hull throughout the vessel except for ground detecting
circuits, secondary circuits of potential and current transformers to be grounded
at switchboard or control panel.

 

1003 Cable

 

10031 Adoption of Cable

 

Insulation conductors and
protecting covering of cables to be in accordance with the international
standards approved by the Classification Society and to be compatible with the
voltage wherever they are used.

 

94

 

Ethylene-propylene rubber
insulated marine type power cables and CS construction for a max. rated
conductor temperature of 85°C
shall be provided for all power-circuits and for lighting circuits and PVC
over-sheathed shall be used for weather deck and battery room, etc.

 

Rubber insulated flexible
cables or cords to be used for
portable equipment. It shall be oil proof heavy-duty rubber cover type.

 

Internal wiring of
switchboards and distribution panels to be carried
out in PVC insulated conductors. It is flame retardant.

 

Special cable or
conductor types, such as coaxial cables etc. for certain electronic circuits
and antenna connection to be used where required to obtain the best possible
operation and a reduction of losses and interference, all as recommended by the
equipment manufacturers.

 

All cables shall be
bunched cable flame retardant. Non combustible cable shall be used in
accordance with the requirements of Class.

 

Cable
feeding electrical rooms and distribution panel boards shall have at least 15% spare capacity over rated rate.

 

The minimum conductor
cross sectional areas must be as follows:

•      Power and lighting
cables(2-3) cores, 1.5 mmz

•      Control cables and two cores
communication cables, 1.0 mmz.

•      Multi-core communication and
instrument cables, 0.5 mmz. (More than 2 cores)

 

10032 Cable Colours

 

Vessel current carrying
parts of different phase shall be clearly marked with distinguishing colours or
numbers which satisfied international standard.

 

10033 Cable Layout

 

All cables shall be laid
according to Rules of classification Society and CB standard of China. Cables
shall be laid as far as possible in protected places to avoid the locations
exposed to the weather. Cables for weather deck-mounted fixtures to be
installed as possible on the inside surface of house structures supporting such
fixtures where cables are liable to damaged, they shall be protected by steel
pipes or plates.

 

Main cables for
generators in engine room, steering gear and bridge to be laid separately as
far as possible.

 

Electronic and special
cables shall be kept at a distance from power cable as far as practical and
also in accordance with the recommendation of equipment manufacturers.

 

Cables passing through
dangerous space shall be protected with steel pipe.

 

In general, cables of
running in group is to be fixed with tape hoops on steel hangers as far as
practicable to permit painting of the surrounding structure without undue
disturbance to the installation.

 

In the rooms and inner
passages where lining is applied, cables shall be laid behind the lining as far
as practicable, and cables in other places, such as on the partition wall,
shall be concealed with

 

95

 

internal conduits as far
as possible. The insulation of the concealed cable shall be suitable for that
purpose.

 

Where cables are exposed
to any mechanical damage, they shall be protected with steel pipe.

 

All cables passing
through fire-proof deck or bulkheads shall be provided with fire-proofing cable
glands or other approved materials.

 

Insulation conductors and
protecting covering of cables to be in accordance with the international
standards approved by the Classification Society and to be compatible with the
voltage wherever they are used.

 

1004 Primary Source

 

Three sets of main diesel
generator of 400 kW should be installed in the engine room and one set of main
switchboard should be installed in the engine control room.

 

One set of emergency
diesel generator of 87 kW and one set of emergency switchboard should be
installed in the emergency generator room.

 

• Main generators x 3 sets

 

Particular of diesel
engine generator as follows:

 

	
  Type

  	
  Synchronous

  
	
  Enclosure

  	
  IP2J

  
	
  Cooling system

  	
  Self-ventilated with air filter

  
	
  Rated output

  	
  400-kW

  
	
  Voltage

  	
  450V AC

  
	
  Phase

  	
  3

  
	
  Frequency

  	
  60Hz

  
	
  Power factor

  	
  0.8 Lagging

  
	
  Revolution

  	
  1800 rpm

  
	
  Rating

  	
  Continuous at full load

  
	
  Insulation

  	
  Class “F” for generator

  
	
   

  	
  Class “B” for excitor

  
	
  Exciting system

  	
  Brushless self-excitation

  

 

Two (2) sets of diesel
engine generator to be arranged for parallel operation.

 

• Emergency Generator x 1 set

 

Particular of emergency
generator as follow:

 

	
  Type

  	
  Synchronous

  
	
  Enclosure

  	
  IP23

  
	
  Cooling system

  	
  Self-ventilated

  
	
  Rated output

  	
  87 kW

  
	
  Voltage

  	
  450 V AC

  
	
  Phase

  	
  3

  
	
  Frequency

  	
  60Hz

  
	
  Power factor

  	
  0.8 Lagging

  
	
  Revolution

  	
  1800 rpm

  
	
  Rating

  	
  Continuous at full load

  
	
  Exciting

  	
  Self-excitation

  

 

96

 

The emergency generator
to be used for supplying the loads, such as gyro compass, auto-pilot, radio
station, interior communication equipment, automation equipment, nautical
instruments, emergency
lights, steering gear, emergency fire pump and emergency air compressor, etc.
when main generator is in case of failure.

 

This generator to be
started automatically in case of occurrence of the power failure of the main
power supply and to automatically supply an electric power to the loads
mentioned above. The
generator engine to be stopped manually.

 

The emergency generator
to be neither run in parallel with the main generator, nor the shore source.

 

1005 Secondary Source

 

Transformers

 

The power transformers to
be three phase, 60Hz, drip proof, dry type, air cooled by natural circulation
with class B insulation.

 

	
   

  	
   

  	
  Output

  	
   

  	
  No.

  	
   

  	
  Voltage

  	
   

  
	
  For general
  service

  	
   

  	
  60 k VA

  	
   

  	
  2

  	
   

  	
  450/230V onefor standby

  	
   

  
	
  Few emergency
  service

  	
   

  	
  20 k VA

  	
   

  	
  2

  	
   

  	
  450/230V one for standby

  	
   

  

 

Storage Batteries

 

Two (2) sets of 24V DC storage batteries for
general use to be installed in the battery room. It’s capacity will be 200 Ah.

 

One (1) set of 24V DC
storage batteries for radio emergency source to be provided. Its capacity will
be about 200 Ah.

 

Storage Batteries:

All batteries shall be of
heavy duty lead acid type, certified gas and maintenance free.

 

All battery sets shall be
fixed in special painted steel frames. All battery sets should be very easy to check and observed.

 

A warning plate “NO
SMOKING” to be put on the wall and it
should be very easy watched.

 

The battery room should
have adequate ventilation.

 

The lamp for the room
should be explosion-proof type, and the switch for the lamp should be installed outside of the room.

 

All cables in the battery
room shall have PVC shield.

 

Charge and discharge panel:

24VDC charge and discharge
panel shall be equipped with voltmeters, ammeters, isolation, changeover a
selector switches for battery charging and circuit breakers.

 

97

 

Battery Charger:

Charger for radio battery
shall be of silicon rectifier type with primary voltage 220VAC, 3 Phase, 60Hz.

 

The charger shall be of
constant type and be protected against short circuit.

 

Charger for all starting
batteries bank shall be fitted close to the battery bank and be protected
against short circuit.

 

1006 Main Switchboard

 

One main switchboard for
control and protection of the generators with 440V and 220V AC outgoing
circuits shall be installed in engine control room.

 

The switchboard shall be
designed to be capable of withstanding the maximum prospective fault current
from generators in accordance with the design.

 

Main switchboard shall be
of self-supporting dead-front single bus-bar type along with necessary fittings
and instrument. The top of the switchboard shall be covered with steel plate
and all sides shall be protected with steel plates. The suitable hand rail
shall be provided at front and rear. Safety mats shall be fitted at the front
and rear of the switchboard over full length. Switchboard shall be sectioned
and the generator panel connect to bus bar by disconnecting switch. Each
section shall be insulated against fire from the adjacent sections.
Heat-resistant plastic shall be used between the section plate.

 

	
  Number

  	
   

  	
  Description

  
	
  3

  	
   

  	
  Generator
  panels

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Synchronizing
  panel (according to Maker’s standard)

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  440V
  consumer panels

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Group
  starter panels

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  220V
  consumer panels

  

 

On the main switchboard
there shall be switch gears, ammeters, voltmeters, a frequency meter, Synchro
scope, wattmeter, power factor meter, pilot lamps, signal lamps, current and
potential transformers, insulation monitor etc. and necessary electric
equipment.

 

The tolerance on meter to
be of the accuracy as per Class requirement for earth lamps, reverse power
relay of main generator, engine hours run meters, synchronizing lamps and
switch.

 

All main switchboard
meters shall have certificating of accuracy.

 

Generator heater shall be
interlocked to ACB and indicator on switchboard. The voltage regulation of main generator shall be such that at all
load from zero to full load the rated voltage at rated power factor is
maintained under steady conditions within (2.5%).

 

The air circuit breaker
of generators to be mounted inside and to be drawn out type. Moulded case
circuit breakers plug in plug to be provided for 440V and 220V outgoing
circuits. Some spare circuit for 440V and 220V shall be provided in main
switchboard.

 

Steering gear motor
circuit shall be only equipped with an instantaneous trip.

 

Moulded case circuit
breaker for shore source connection shall have a low voltage trip coil with
interlock.

 

98

 

The
moulded case circuit breakers for feeder circuits of motors described in
section shall be provided with a shunt trip coil for remote emergency stop.

 

All
bus bars in main switchboard shall be made of commercial copper.

 

Switchboard
enclosure to be IP22.

 

Construction
is to allow for louvers on doors front. All cable entries are to be from the
bottom.

 

Switchboards
to be fitted with a top canopy and fluorescent lights shall be supplied.

 

The
circuit breakers for generators to be magnetically, trip free air circuit
beakers having long time over current trip, instantaneous trip, short time
delay trip, under voltage trip and reverse power trip features. Each air
circuit breaker is to have the required interruption capacity against short
circuit current.

 

Hour
counter meters shall be fitted for following motors/equipment:

•      Main engine

•      Auxiliary engines

•      Air Compressor

•      Compressor of Air
Conditioning System

•      Cargo Pumps

•      Purifiers

 

The
preferential tripping system shall be provided and so arranged that in an event
of the generators becoming overload, the non-essential loads are disconnected
automatically by shunt trip relay before the generator circuit breaker is
opened.

 

1007 Emergency
Switchboard

 

The
emergency switchboard shall be
located in the Emergency Generator Room. It shall be constructed and tested
same as the technological requirements of the main switchboard.

 

The
emergency switchboard shall consist of emergency generator panel, AC 440V and
220V feeder panel complete with switch gears, voltmeter, ammeter, watrmeter,
frequency meter, pilot lamps and other necessary instruments.

 

All
bus bars in emergency switchboard shall be made of commercial copper.

 

The
emergency generator shall be protected by a three-pole air circuit breaker with
an under  voltage tripping
device, and a time delayed over current tripping device.

 

Interlock
circuit shall be provided between emergency generator A.C.B. and main bus tie
moulded case type circuit breaker.

 

Emergency
switchboard enclosure is IP22, to be installed in emergency generator space and
shall be energised from the main switchboard under normal operating conditions.

 

The
Emergency switchboard should be consisted of:

 

	
  Number

  	
   

  	
  Description

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Generator
  panels

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  440V
  and 220V consumer panels

  

 

99

 

1008 Shore Connection Box

 

One (1) set of shore
connection box for receiving AC 440V.250A, 3-phase, 60Hz shore source to be
wired to the main switchboard.

 

The box to be of drip-proof
type with a ammeter, KW hour-meter, three (3) poles moulded case type circuit
breaks, connecting terminals and phase sequence indicator.

 

Shore connection box
should be incorporated with the emergency switchboard and main switchboard.

 

An interlock shall be
provided for the generator ACB’s.

 

1009 Distribution System

 

Separate main feeders
shall be fed from the main switchboard to essential pump motors and steering
gear motors.

 

Motors, of which starters
are assembled into the group starter panels, however, shall be connected to the
AC 440V feeder bus of the main switchboard.

 

Lighting system and AC
220V system of radio equipment and nautical instruments shall be connected to
each distribution board fed from AC 220V feeder panel of the emergency
switchboard.

 

Separate feeders shall
also be fed from the emergency switchboard mentioned above.

 

Galley equipment would
normally be supplied from the galley equipment switchboard through insulating
transformer.

 

Nautical equipment to be
fed through section board from main switchboard and emergency board via
two-way, and the two ways are standby each other and changed-over
automatically.

 

The accommodation
lighting system and the engine room lighting system shall be distributed
adequately through distribution boards fed from AC 220V feeder panel.

 

Deck lights shall be
supplied with power from individual circuit of distribution board.

 

DC 24V system of alarm
and automation device, fire alarm general alarm and some interior communication
equipment and nautical instruments shall be distributed from DC 24V
distribution board.

 

All section boards and
distribution boards shall be enclosed with steel sheet case.

 

Distribution boards and
section boards fitted in the living quarters and other similar places shall be
non-waterproof type, and those fitted in the engine room, steering gear room,
stores and other similar places to be of drip-proof or watertight type.

 

All distribution boards
and section boards shall be equipped with two or three pole moulded case type
circuit breakers with thermal type trip.

 

The directory label
showing the service of each outgoing circuit shall be fitted at the back side
of the door.

 

100

 

All section and
distribution boards are to have at lease 10% spare ways.

 

Every section board and
distribution board shall be protected by
steel case.

 

Section boards and
distribution boards shall compose the necessary component as follows:

 

For 440V circuits shall
be equipped with 3-pole moulded case circuit breakers with overload tripping
device.

 

For 220V circuits shall
be equipped with 2-pole or 3-pole unit switch with overload tripping device.

 

For 24V circuits of alarm
and safety system shall be equipped with fuses only.

 

1010 Power System

 

All motors and motor
starters shall be suitable for working in all climatic conditions and in full
accordance with the requirements of the Classification Society.

 

All generators, motors on
exposed deck with power equal or over
20 kW shall have space heater.

 

All motors, unless
otherwise noted, shall be totally enclosed or drip-proof and be of squirrel
cage induction type.

 

The motors, in general,
should be designed to operate on 440V, AC 3-phase, 60Hz and the motors of
fractional horse power should be designed to operate on 220V, AC. Single phases
or three (3) phase AC.

 

Bearings should be
provided in accordance with maker’s standard.

 

In general all stator
windings shall be of Class B insulation, except for special service motors.

 

[ILLEGIBLE]
Starters

 

A starter shall be
provided for all electric motors above 0.5 kW.

 

	
  Up to 35 kW

  	
   

  	
  – Direct on line pipe

  
	
  Between 35 kW and 100
  kW

  	
   

  	
  – Star-delta type

  
	
  More than 100 kW

  	
   

  	
  – Autotransformer type

  

 

The important load’s
starter and the capacity of motor over 30 kW to be fitted the running hour
counter.

 

In general, starters
should be of splash proof marine magnetic control type and shall be constructed
suitable for bulkheads and/or floor mounting. Starters should be assembled in group
starter panels or semi-group starter panels as far as practicable.

 

Starters for major engine
room equipment shall be grouped in the group start panel in the engine control room.

 

Starters for other
equipment shall be grouped in engine room or to be separate close to the
Equipment.

 

For small motors of
single phase may be manually operated by line switch protective fuse on each
pole, or thermal trip device.

 

101

 

Starters assembled in the
group starter panel and starters located out of sight of motors shall be
equipped with local start/stop push button switch near respective motors.

 

Starters built into
drip-proof enclosed steel cubicle with hinged door and any cubicle shall be
checked and repaired safely without de-energizing adjacent starters.

 

Local start/stop switches
shall be provided near the motors except for those the starters are installed near the motors.

 

1011
Operation And Control Of
Generator

 

The
main switchboard shall be suitable for manual and automatic
synchronizing and automatic load sharing operation.

 

The auto synchronizer
shall generate commands to adjust the frequency and phase of the incoming
generators. It shall monitor the above parameters and issue closing command to
the circuit breaker.

 

Automatic proportional
kilowatt load sharing between the parallel running diesel generators shall be
provided.

 

The load sharing unit
shall have the following functions:

 

Detection of active power
loaded on each parallel running generator.

 

Operation of governor
motors until the ratio of the loaded power to the rated output of each parallel
running generator becomes the same.

 

Automatic load sharing is
fitted. The disconnecting operation of the parallel running generator under no
load conditions shall be handled manually.

 

Automatic frequency
regulation at the set value by manipulating both the governors in close
coordination with the load sharing control.

 

The trouble of generator
engine starting failure, control power failure and ACB non-close shall be
alarmed in the engine control room.

 

When main electric power
supply failure the emergency generator to start and connect to the emergency
switchboard automatically as required
by Classification Rules. The emergency switchboard to supply the gyro compass,
auto-pilot, GMDSS radio station, interior communication equipment, automation
equipment, nautical instruments, full ships deck emergency lights in
accommodation and engine room, steering gear, emergency fire pump.

 

1012 Fuses and Circuit
Breakers

 

All fuses and circuit
breakers shall be of approved type and suitably sized to circuit requirements.

 

The fuses shall be of
automatic type and shall be used for protection
of feeder circuits, control circuits, alarm circuits, indication circuits etc.

 

1013 Lighting System

 

The lighting system to
comprise as follows:

 

102

 

	
  General lighting system

  	
   

  	
  AC 220V

  
	
  Emergency lighting
  system

  	
   

  	
  AC 220V

  
	
  Cabins

  	
   

  	
  220V A.C. 2x20W
  fluorescent.

  
	
  Engine Room/ Store

  	
   

  	
  220V A.C., 2x30W,
  watertight.

  
	
  Floodlights

  	
   

  	
  220V A.C. 150W halogen
  (6 sets or more).

  
	
  Emergency Lights

  	
   

  	
  220V A.C. 2x20W
  fluorescent. These lights shall be powered by emergency generator.

  

 

The vessel to be
efficiently illuminated throughout with fluorescent, incandescent mercury
vapour and/or halogen lighting fixtures.

 

Lighting equipment to be
supplied with 220 V AC single phase, 60Hz, from distribution board which are
fed from 220 V AC three phase feeder panel of main switchboard and/or emergency
switchboard.

 

The emergency lighting is
to form part of the overall lighting system.

 

Emergency lighting shall
be provided throughout the vessel to furnish
proper illumination for guiding crew to lifeboat station and permit the
operation of essential services. Escape light with battery back up.

 

Emergency lighting lamp
supplied from emergency AC source system and shall be automatically switched in
case of normal AC source failure.

 

Radio emergency light to
be supplied from radio battery.

 

Distribution panels and
junction boxes to be installed at protected, well accessible place and wherever
possible reset into panels.

 

The vessel shall be
equipped with adequate safe
lighting to cover the cargo and manifold area of the vessel including bunker
connection and hose handing equipment. The illumination for cargo manifold area
shall be of minimum 70 LUX.

 

All floodlights on
exposed deck shall be water proof of stainless steel AISI 316L.

 

1014 Navigation Lights
and Signal Lights

 

In general cabling to be
installed at the rear of mast and clear of any ladder access so that damage
does not occur when people are ascending or
descending masts.

 

Navigation lanterns to
have different lamp bases to ensure that incorrect lamp voltage is not used.
Navigation and signal light equipment and construction to be provided according to the regulations and rules of
classification.

 

The navigation light and
signal light to be controlled in wheelhouse control console.

 

Navigation to be double
lamp and provided as follows:

 

One (1) set Navigation
light shall consist of as follows:

 

1 — Fore. mast head
light.

 

103

 

1 — Aft. mast head light.

1 — Fore. anchor light.

1 — Aft. anchor light.

1 — Sterm light. (red and white)

1 — Side light port.

1 — Side light starboard.

2 — Not-under command, (red)

 

Navigation light control
box power to be fed from both of main switchboard and emergency switchboard.

 

Search light and day
signal.

 

Search lights and
day-signal to be delivered and installed in accordance with Rules and Regulations.
Day-signal lamp, with special bulb of 24V, 60W, with wooden box. Receptacles
for this lamp to be provided on both bridge wings.

 

2 —
Hand turnable navigation search lights, with special bulb of 220V, 1,000 watts,
to be installed on the top of wheelhouse.

1 — Flash right (green)

1 — Fog light

1 — Day-signal lamp, with
special bulb of 24 volts, 60 watts

 

Signal lights to be as
follows:

 

2 — Lights at aft. mast
green.

5 — Lights at aft. mast white.

5 — Lights at aft. mast red.

 

Signal light control box
power to be supply by wheelhouse control console.

 

1015 Internal
Communication & Alarm System

 

10151 Internal
Communication

 

The system herein
specified shall be suitable designed to meet the requirements for rule.

 

One (1) set Sound powered
telephone system shall be provided as follows:

 

Wheelhouse / Engine
control room / Steering gear compartment / Fire fighting room / Emergency
generator room / Cargo control room / 2nd / E’s accommodation

 

The headset for the
telephone in steering gear room, emergency generator room shall be provided.

 

One (l) set of twenty
four (24) ways automatic telephone system should be installed on the vessel.
From wheelhouse to all cabins, mess rooms and control stations.

 

One (1) set of public
addresser of 100 W output, with talk back stations to be designed for ship’s
manoeuvring, emergency information, crew call and public broadcasting. The
system can be connected with automatic telephone exchanger and can be called by
telephone extensions.

 

Speakers and talk back
stations arrangement shall be according to accommodation plan.

 

104

 

10152 Alarm System

 

101521 Fire alarm system
(AC230V DC24V)

 

One (1) set of fire alarm
system shall be provided as follows:

 

1                             One
(1) set of fire auto alarm and monitor panel in wheelhouse.

2                             One
(1) set of fire alarm repeater alarm extension panels shall be installed in
engine control room.

3                             n
general, optical type smoke detector, electronic heat detector, flame detector
to be located for fire detecting.

4                             Manual
alarm call point to be provided in passage, engine room through accommodation
IP 44 and on open weather deck IP 56

 

101422 Engineers alarm
(DC24V AC220V)

 

One (1) set of engineer’s
alarm system shall be provided for alarming and monitoring of main and
generator engine auxiliary boiler and auxiliary machines in the engine control
room. The main engine extension alarm shall be provided as for as follows:

 

Chief engineer officer’s
room, second engineer’s room officer’s mess room, officer’s smoking room,
wheelhouse.

 

Audible alarm shall be
operated until silenced by a manually operated reset push button switch, and
shall be used as common for all alarms.

 

In addition, the audible
alarm shall be operated in engine room simultaneously.

 

The system inclusive
engineer calling function.

 

The power to be supplied
from engine control console.

 

101523 Signal and warn
alarm in engine room

 

In engine room, suitable
amount of signal box with logo lamp and runnings flash light red/yellow to be
installed, with the following illuminated signal alarm identification signs.

 

Simultaneously with alarm
display in signal boxes in engine room rotating lights and electric siren to be
actuated.

 

Power supply AC 220V DC
24V from emergency source.

 

101524 General alarm
system

 

One (1) set of general
alarm system shall be provided. The alarm bell shall be installed in inner
passage, galley, mess room, steering gear room, engine control room, etc.

 

Engine room to be
provided rotational audible and visual alarm column.

 

Wheelhouse to be
installed buzzer.

 

General alarm junction
box to be provided for each deck. General alarm push button to be installed

 

105

 

in the port and stbd. of
life boat embarkation station. The alarm shall sound double tone. Power to be
supplied from wheelhouse control console.

 

101525 Ref. chamber alarm
(DC24V)

 

One set of ref.,
provision chamber alarm device shall be provided. Each one (1) switch shall be
fitted in the galley and outside of galley so as to signal when someone is
locked in.

 

Power to be supplied from
wheelhouse control console.

 

1016 Nautical Equipment

 

	
  Gyrocompass
  (with two repeaters on the both side of bridge wings and one repeater in
  steering gear room.)

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Auto Pilot

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Magnetic compass
  (Standard magnetic reflector 

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Binnacle type
  c/w magnifying 

  Glass and azimuth circle.)

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Echo sounder
  (450m range c/w recorder.)

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Doppler Log.

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Radar
  (X-band ARPA Raster scan type with true motion display unit; 

  S-band ARPA Raster scan type with relative motion display.)

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
  DGPS navigator

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
  Automatic
  Identification System (AIS)

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Voyage Data
  Recorder (VDR)

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Window wipers
  (horizontal c/w F.W. washing)

  	
   

  	
  3

  
	
  Clear View
  Screens (300mm diameter)

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
  Anemometer and
  anemoscope

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Air Horn

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Mechanical
  plunger horn (electric motor driven)

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  Clock and
  Barometer

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Rudder
  Angle Indicator (of wall mounted and two additional rudder angle repeaters to
  be supplied on both side of bridge wings.)

  	
   

  	
  1 set

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Propeller
  R.P.M indicators (one (1) in wheelhouse and one (1) in ECR, two additional
  propeller R.P.M repeaters to be supplied on both side of bridge wings.

  	
   

  	
  1 set

  

 

All rules and regulations
should be updated with the latest requirements till the date the contracts be
signed.

 

All nautical/communication
equipments to be to be with approval certificated.

 

1017 Radio Equipment

 

Equipments as hereinafter
specified are the major components and characteristics of the

 

106

 

installations, all
accessories necessary for complete operation shall be delivered by shipyard.

 

All equipment shall able
to communicate with the other relevant navigation/radio communication
requirements with amendments for [ILLEGIBLE] with additional equipment
[ILLEGIBLE].

 

	
  MF/HF Radio Receiver (250W) with Voice Connection

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
  INMARSAT-C MES with built in EGC receiver.

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
  VHF/DSC radio telephones with built in VHF/DSC Watch
  receivers.

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
  Radar transponders (SART)

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Navtex Receiver (518 kHz) (with automatic printing
  of navigation and meteorological warning broadcast)

  	
   

  	
  1

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  VHF 2 – Way radios.

  	
   

  	
  3

  
	
  Robust, intrinsically safe, battery operated,
  portable [ILLEGIBLE] radios for use in daily operational communication.

  	
   

  	
  3

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  Air band transceivers (one portable) with spare
  batteries and battery charger shall be provided

  	
   

  	
  2

  
	
  Ship Security Alert System

  	
   

  	
   

  

 

107

 

Makers’ List of 5500dwt Class Oil Tanker

 

1.                          The list
defines the subcontractors of major plant, machinery, equipments and material
without preference.

 

2.                          Where
two or more makers are described for a single item, the Builder has the right
to select the maker who offers the lowest price, however, equipment must always
meet the specification requirements. The Builder will give an order list to the
Buyer soon after effectiveness of the contract, to specify which maker they
will use. If the Buyer prefers a maker who offers a higher price, the Buyer
shall either push the maker to offer the lowest price as others are offering,
or bear the cost of price difference within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the
above-mentioned order list.

 

3.                          Both the
Owner and the Yard have the right to nominate makers which were not involved in
this list provided their products meet the requirements of the specification
and mutually agreed between the Owner and the Yard.

 

4.                          Other
plants, machineries, equipments and materials which are not mentioned in the
list shall be supplied by the subcontractors selected by the Builder, however
all must meet specification requirements and Buyers consent which shall not be
unreasonably withheld.

 

5.                          Items
marked with *indicate buyer’s preference and the builder will take this into
consideration when selecting suppliers

 

 

	
  NO.

  	
   

  	
  Name of equipment

  	
   

  	
  Manufacturer

  	
   

  	
  Country

  
	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Steering gear and rudder

  	
   

  	
  *South China Marine Plant (SCM)

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Becker(Licence)

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Nanjing Hanghai Equip. Co

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Nanjing Hongzhuang Equip. Co

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Windlass & Mooring Winch

  	
   

  	
  *South China Marine Plant (SCM)

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Zheng-Jiang

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Tai Xin

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Wu Xi Hai Tian

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  3

  	
   

  	
  Provision Crane

  	
   

  	
  *Zhenjiang marine auxiliary machinery works

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Normarine License – HN

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Huanan

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Hatlapa Licence – NJ

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Wu Xi Hai Tian

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Wuxi Huaxing Equipment Co

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  4

  	
   

  	
  Hose Crane

  	
   

  	
  *South China Marine Plant (SCM)

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Normarine License - HN

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Huanan

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Hatlapa License - NJ

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Tai Xin

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Wu Xi Hai Tian

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Wuxi Huaxing Equipment Co

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  5

  	
   

  	
  Bow Thruster

  	
   

  	
  *Shanghai hange M&E equipment

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Co., Ltd(Schottel Licence)

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Kawasaki License - WH

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  6

  	
   

  	
  Fixed Pitch Propeller

  	
   

  	
  Huigang

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  *Dalian

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Zheng - Jiang

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  7

  	
   

  	
  Rescue Boat/

  	
   

  	
  *Zhenjiang marine auxiliary machinery works

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
  Freefall Lifeboat & Davitt

  	
   

  	
  Norsafe License

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Hardin License

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Jiangyin China

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Qing-Dao Bei-Yang

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Qing-Dao Bei-Hai

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  8

  	
   

  	
  Liferaft

  	
   

  	
  Shanghai Da-Cheng

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Shanghai Yue-Long

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  9

  	
   

  	
  Paint/Coating

  	
   

  	
  Hempel

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  *Jotun

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  IP International paint

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Sigma

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Kansai – cosco

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Chugoku

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  10

  	
   

  	
  Zinc/Aluminum Anodes

  	
   

  	
  Jiang-Yin

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  Shanghai

  	
   

  	
  China

  

 

 

	
  11

  	
   

  	
  Hatch Cover ISO
  Standard

  	
   

  	
  Huang Shan – JY 

  Cheng Jiang – JY 

  Wu Xi Hai Lan 

  Wu-Xi Dong-Zhou

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China 

  China 

  China

  
	
  12

  	
   

  	
  Portable Ladder

  	
   

  	
  Huang Shan – JY 

  Cheng Jiang – JY 

  Wu Xi Hai Lan 

  Wu-Xi Dong-Zhou

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China 

  China 

  China

  
	
  13

  	
   

  	
  Window & Scutle

  	
   

  	
  Huang Shan – JY 

  Cheng Jiang – JY 

  Wu Xi Hai Lan 

  Wu Xi Dong Zhou

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China 

  China 

  China

  
	
  14

  	
   

  	
  Anchor

  	
   

  	
  Y-D Casting LTD 

  Jingjiang 

  Zheng jiang 

  Dalian

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China 

  China 

  China

  
	
  15

  	
   

  	
  Chain Cable

  	
   

  	
  Jing Jiang 

  Zheng Jiang

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China

  
	
  16

  	
   

  	
  Fire Proof Door

  	
   

  	
  Su-Zhou 

  Cao Yang (6301 Factory) 

  Hai Lu (Jiang Yin) 

  Huang Shan – JY 

  Wu Xi Hai Lan

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China 

  China 

  China

  China

  
	
  17

  	
   

  	
  Fire Proof Material

  	
   

  	
  Su-Zhou 

  Cao Yang (6301 Factory)

  Hai-Lu (Jiang Yin)

  Huang Shan – JY 

  Wu Xi Hai Lan

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China 

  China 

  China

  China

  
	
  18

  	
   

  	
  Bath Units

  	
   

  	
  *Shanghai Hui He 

  Chao Yang

  Hai-Lu

  Su Zhou MuYi

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China 

  China

  China

  
	
  19

  	
   

  	
  Galley Equipment

  	
   

  	
  Jiang -Yin 

  Wu-Xi Qian-Qiq

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China

  
	
  20

  	
   

  	
  Laundry Equipment

  	
   

  	
  Jiang-Yin Hai Lu 

  Su-Zhou

  	
   

  	
  China 

  China

  

 

 

B. MACHINERY PART

 

	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Main Engine

  	
   

  	
  *Daihatsu License
  [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
   

  	
  China

  Germany

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Gear Box

  	
   

  	
  *Chongqing

  Hangzhou Gear Box Co LTD

  Siohuan Qingjiang 

  package supply (Imported)

  subject to Purchaser’s Approval

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  
	
  3

  	
   

  	
  Main Diesel Generator

  	
   

  	
  

  CAT 

  Cummins License

  	
   

  	
  China

  USA

  China

  
	
  4

  	
   

  	
  Emergency Diesel
  Generator

  	
   

  	
  *Cummins License 

  MAN/Lindenberg 

  CAT

  	
   

  	
  China

  Germany

  USA

  
	
  5

  	
   

  	
  Air Compressor

  	
   

  	
  *Ningbo Tianli

  Sperry

  Hamworthy License

  Sauer & Sohn License

  Nan Jing jiang Yue

  H & H

  	
   

  	
  China

  
	
  6

  	
   

  	
  Air Dryer

  	
   

  	
  Nan-Tong Hang-Hai

  Nan-Tong Marine

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  
	
  7

  	
   

  	
  Centrifugal Pumps (E/R)

  	
   

  	
  Shanghai 

  Guang Ning 

  Zhenghua

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  
	
  8

  	
   

  	
  Screw Pumps (E/R)

  	
   

  	
  Tian-Jing Shide

  Tian-Jing 

  Zhenghua

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  
	
  9

  	
   

  	
  Purifiers

  	
   

  	
  Alfa-Laval

  *Westfalia

  Nan Jing Lu Zhou

  Taixing

  Mitsubishi

  	
   

  	
  Sweden

  F.R.G

  China

  China

  Japan

  
	
  10

  	
   

  	
  Oily Water Separator

  	
   

  	
  *Taiko

  Shanghai

  Tai-Xiang

  *Nan-Jing Lu-Zhou

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  11

  	
   

  	
  Oily Water Discharge
  Monitoring System

  	
   

  	
  *VAF

  OPTEC

  Cleantoll

  Jawa

  	
   

  	
  Holland 

  Finland

  Sweden

  
	
  12

  	
   

  	
  Incinerator

  	
   

  	
  *Nanjing Luzhou

  Golar Licence (N-J)

  Nisshin

  Taixin

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  Japan

  China

  

 

 

	
  13

  	
   

  	
  Fresh Water Generator

  	
   

  	
  *Westfalia

  Gefico-Aquamar

  A.P.V.

  Guangdong Deli

  Serck

  	
   

  	
  Sweden

  Denmark

  China

  Germany

  
	
  14

  	
   

  	
  Sewage Treatment Plant

  	
   

  	
  *Jiangsu Antarctic
  Mach. Co. Ltd.

  Taixing

  Hamworthy License

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  
	
  15

  	
   

  	
  Stern Tube Seal

  	
   

  	
  Blohm + Voss License

  Simplex License – Split type

  *Cedervall License – Split type

  Ning Bo

  IHC

  Package Supply (imported)

  Jiangsu Dongtai

  Subject to Purchaser’s Approval

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  

  

  China

  
	
  16

  	
   

  	
  Fans (E/R & Other)

  	
   

  	
  Nordisk License

  Qing-Dao

  Nantong

  Tai Xin

  Shanghai

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  17

  	
   

  	
  Air Conditioning Plant

  	
   

  	
  *Jiangsu zhaosheng 

  Viking

  H & H

  Carrier License (SH)

  Tai Xin 

  Zheng Jiang

  Hi-Press

  	
   

  	
  China

  Singapore

  

  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  18

  	
   

  	
  Air Conditioning For
  ECR

  	
   

  	
  *Jiangsu zhaosheng 

  Viking

  H & H

  Carrier License (SM)

  Hi-Press

  	
   

  	
  China

  Singapore

  

  China

  
	
  19

  	
   

  	
  Refrigerating Plant

  	
   

  	
  *Jiangsu zhaosheng

  Viking

  Carrier License (BH)

  Tai Xin

  Zheng jiang

  H & H

  	
   

  	
  China

  Singapore

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  20

  	
   

  	
  Monitoring & Alarm
  System 

  For E/R

  	
   

  	
  *VAF

  Scana molland

  Teresaki License

  STN Atlas License

  Shanghai Rongde

  Goldem

  	
   

  	
  Holland

  

  

  China

  

 

 

	
  21

  	
   

  	
  Bridge & ECR
  Consoles

  	
   

  	
  Norcontrol

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
  *Xin Ya+ ABB

  Schneider License

  Guangdong Yunfu

  Wenzhou Jiangnan

  STN Atlas License

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  22

  	
   

  	
  Fire Fighting System

  	
   

  	
  *Shanghai anxing

  Wu-Han Xi-Pu

  Jiang-Xi Marine Valve

  Shanghai

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  23

  	
   

  	
  Fire Fighting Pump /
  General

  Service Pump

  	
   

  	
  Tianjing

  Zhenghua

  Guang ning

  Shanghai

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  24

  	
   

  	
  Emergency Fire Pump

  	
   

  	
  Tianjing

  Zhenghua

  Guang ning

  Shanghai

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  25

  	
   

  	
  Engine Room Crane

  	
   

  	
  Jing Jiang

  Jiang-Yin

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  
	
  26

  	
   

  	
  Aux Boiler

  	
   

  	
  *Qingdao Aalborg
  (China)

  Shazhou [ILLEGIBLE]

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  
	
  27

  	
   

  	
  Air Reservoir

  	
   

  	
  JingJiang

  Jianghai Marine Equipment

  Qing-Dao

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  
	
  28

  	
   

  	
  Fuel Oil Supplement
  Unit

  	
   

  	
  Hansegawa (Arigine)
  Macine Co., Ltd

  Nan-Tong (Key parts imported)

  *Alfa-Laval

  Westfalia

  Package Supply (imported)

  Tai Xin

  Nan Jing Lu Zhou

  Suspect to Purchaser’s Approval

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  Sweden

  Germany

  

  China

  China

  
	
  29

  	
   

  	
  Flow Meter

  	
   

  	
  Shanghai

  He-Fei

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  

 

C. CARGO SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

 

	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Cargo Pump

  	
   

  	
  *Tian-Jing

  Huaiyin

  Tain-Jing Sui-De

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Stripping / Slop pump

  	
   

  	
  *Tian-Jing

  Huaiyin

  Tain-Jing Sui-De

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  
	
  3

  	
   

  	
  Stripping Ejector

  	
   

  	
  *Tian-Jing

  Huaiyin

  Tain-Jing Sui-De

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  
	
  4

  	
   

  	
  Water Ballast Pump
  & Foam

  Pump & Fire Pump & Tank

  Cleaning Pump

  	
   

  	
  Tain-Jing Da-Huang

  KSB License (SH)

  Zhenghua

  Guangning

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  

 

 

	
  5

  	
   

  	
  Portable Tank cleaning

  Machine

  	
   

  	
  Scanjet

  Polar

  Toftejorg

  Dasoc

  *Victor Pyrate

  	
   

  	
  China

  Sweden

  
	
  6

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  	
   

  
	
  7

  	
   

  	
  Cargo Tank Level /

  Temperature Pressure Gauge

  System

  	
   

  	
  Auxitrol

  Scana

  *Shanghai Rongde

  Saab

  	
   

  	
  Singapore

  Norway

  China

  Sweden

  
	
  8

  	
   

  	
  Independent High-High

  Level Alarm

  	
   

  	
  Auxitrol

  Scana

  *Shanghai Rongde

  Saab

  	
   

  	
  Singapore

  Norway

  China

  Sweden

  
	
  9

  	
   

  	
  Oil/Water Interface
  Detector

  	
   

  	
  TS Tank System

  *MMC

  	
   

  	
  Swiss

  USA

  
	
  10

  	
   

  	
  Butterfly Valve (supply

  information to the purchaser)

  	
   

  	
  Nan-Tong

  *Da-Lian(Nakakita)

  Shanghai

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  
	
  11

  	
   

  	
  Heating Coils SUS316L

  	
   

  	
  Nihon Hi-Ment

  Chongzhou Boiler Device Co

  Korea Made Subject to Purchasers Approval

  Local Supply Subject to Purchasers Approval

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  China

  

  China

  
	
  12

  	
   

  	
  Portable Gas Free Fan

  	
   

  	
  Scanjet

  Dasic

  *Victor Pyrate

  Shanghai

  	
   

  	
  China

  Sweden

  

  China

  
	
  13

  	
   

  	
  Gas Detection System

  	
   

  	
  Consilium

  Omikron

  Auxitrol/Gasbal

  Imported subject to purchasers approval

  *Shanghai Rongde

  	
   

  	
  Sweden

  Norway

  

  China

  
	
  14

  	
   

  	
  Mist Water System For
  E/R

  	
   

  	
  *Tyco

  Semco

  Nabco

  Wuhan

  Nanjing

  	
   

  	
  UK

  Denmark

  Japan

  China

  China

  

 

 

D. ELECTRIC PART

 

	
  1

  	
   

  	
  Alternator

  	
   

  	
  Stamford

  Siemens License

  *Taiyo / Nishishiba

  Main generator package supply subject to

  purchasers approval

  	
   

  	
  

  China

  Japan

  
	
  2

  	
   

  	
  Electric Motor

  	
   

  	
  Stamford

  Siemens License

  ABB License

  *Taiyo

  Package supply subject to purchasers approval

  	
   

  	
  

  China

  China

  Japan

  
	
  3

  	
   

  	
  Switchboard & Emergency

  Switch Board

  	
   

  	
  JRCS License

  STN Atlas License

  HDW License (W-X)

  Jiangnan

  Terasaki License

  Guangdong Yunfu

  *Xin Ya+ABB

  	
   

  	
  

  China

  China

  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  4

  	
   

  	
  Transformer

  	
   

  	
  Tai Zhou

  Lu-Shuen

  *Gaoyao

  Jiangnan

  Zhen-Jiang

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  

  China

  
	
  5

  	
   

  	
  Starter & Group Starter

  	
   

  	
  *Xin Ya+ABB

  Shanghai Electric Group

  JRCS License

  Nan-Jing Han-Hai

  Jiangnan

  Guangdong Yunfu

  HDW License

  Siemens License

  STN Atlas

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  6

  	
   

  	
  Light Appliance

  	
   

  	
  Shen-Gan

  Zhe-Jiang

  Haixing

  Yanyang

  Shanghai

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  7

  	
   

  	
  Distribution Panel

  	
   

  	
  *XinYa+ABB

  Shanghai

  Guangdong Yunfu

  Nan-Jing

  Tai Zhou

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  8

  	
   

  	
  Radio Equipment

  	
   

  	
  JRC

  *Simbo Marine Systems Ltd. (Furuno)

  Tokimec

  STN Atlas

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  Japan

  Japan

  

 

 

	
  9

  	
   

  	
  Interior Communication

  	
   

  	
  JRC 

  *Simbo Marine Systems Ltd. [ILLEGIBLE]

  Tokimec

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  Japan 

  Japan

  
	
  10

  	
   

  	
  Navigation Equipment

  	
   

  	
  JRC

  *Simbo Marine Systems Ltd. (Furuno)

  Tokimec

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  Japan 

  Japan

  
	
  11

  	
   

  	
  Cable

  	
   

  	
  *Shanghai

  Yang Zhou Yuan-Yang

  Chang-Zhou

  Yang-Zhou Guangming

  Suzhou Draka

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  China

  China

  China

  
	
  12

  	
   

  	
  Master Clock

  	
   

  	
  Seiko

  Nippon Hakuyo

  Citizen

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  Japan 

  Japan

  
	
  13

  	
   

  	
  Gyro/Autopilot

  	
   

  	
  *Simbo Marine Systems Ltd. (Tokimec)

  Anschutz

  Sperry

  Robertsen

  C. Plath

  STN Atlas

  	
   

  	
  China/Japan

  Germany

  USA

  Norway

  Japan

  Germany

  
	
  14

  	
   

  	
  Echo Sounder

  	
   

  	
  JRC

  *Simbo Marine Systems Ltd. (Furuno)

  Tokimec

  STN Atlas

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  Japan 

  Japan

  
	
  15

  	
   

  	
  Speed log

  	
   

  	
  JRC

  *Simbo Marine Systems Ltd. (Furuno)

  Tokimec

  STN Atlas

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  Japan 

  Japan

  
	
  16

  	
   

  	
  Air Horn

  	
   

  	
  Jiang-Xi

  Saracom

  	
   

  	
  China

  China

  
	
  17

  	
   

  	
  DGPS Receiver

  	
   

  	
  JRC

  *Simbo Marine Systems Ltd. (Furuno)

  Tokimec

  STN Atlas

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  Japan 

  Japan

  
	
  18

  	
   

  	
  Navtex Receiver Weather Fax

  	
   

  	
  JRC

  *Simbo Marine Systems Ltd. (Furuno)

  Tokimec

  STN Atlas

  	
   

  	
  Japan

  Japan 

  Japan

  
	
  19

  	
   

  	
  VDR

  	
   

  	
  *Consilium Gmbh

  	
   

  	
  Sweden

Source: [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00110-of-00352.parquet"}, [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00110-of-00352.parquet"}]]